HomeMy WebLinkAboutVOLUME 2 OF 2 LAKESHORE CONTRACTVolume 2 of 2
Bid Specifications
Bid Item #12 -205
Fort Gordon Gate 4 Booster Pump Station
For
Augusta, Georgia — Utilities Department
Bid Due: Thursday, October 4, 2012 @ 3:00 P.M.
Augusta, Georgia does not have a race or gender conscious Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) program for
pr c (rots nerving Augusta, .Georg =ia as the source of funding. Augusta does enforce imuutator"y DBE requirements of
federal and state regencies on contracts funded by such agencies and has a DBE Program to comply with U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT), Federal Transit Administration (FTA), Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
. and other federal and state mandated DICE requirements for certain DOT, FTA, FAA, and other federal and state
=assisted contracts as required by 49 C.F.R. Part 26, et. seq. and/or 49 C.F.R. Part 23, et. seq. This DBE program is nttiy
for DOT, PTA and FAA assisted contracts and other federal or stale funded contracts having mandatory DBE
requirements. (See Article 13 of the Augusta, GA Code.)
Augusta, Georgia prohibits any language in any solicitation, bid or contract that is inconsistent with the July 21, 2011
Court Order in the case, Thompson Wrecking, Inc. v. Augusta Georgia; civil action No. 1:07 CY -019 Any such
language appearing in any Augusta, Georgia solicitation, bid or contract is void and unenforceable.
A copy of this Order can be reviewed at wwrctatretrstatmaov home page.
Thanks, fir doing business with us .. .
Geri A. Sams, Procurement Director
530 Greene Street, Room 605
Augusta, Georgia 30901
Bid 12 -205 Fort Gordon Gate 4 Booster Pump. Station
Page 1 of 1
Rev. 8/22/2011
Volume 2 of 2
Bid Specifications
Bid Item #12 -205
Fort Gordon Gate 4 Booster Pump Station
For
Augusta, Georgia — Utilities Department
Bid Due: Thursday, October 4, 2012 @ 3:00 P.M.
Augusta, Georgia does not have a race or gender conscious Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) program for
pr•r >.; cts having Augusta, Georgia' as the source of f carding. Augusta does enforce nuoutatory DBE requirements of
federal and state agencies on contracts funded by such agencies and has a DBE Program to comply with U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT), Federal Transit Administration (FTA), Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
and other federal and state mandated DBE requirements for certain DOT, FT4, FAA, and other federal and state
assisted contracts as required by 49 C.F.R. Part 26, et. seq. and /or 49 C.F.R. Part 23, et. seq. This DBE program is .only
for DOT, FTA and FAA assisted contracts and other federal or state funded contracts having rnandattny DBE
requirements. (See Article 13 of the Augusta, GA Code.)
Augusta, Georgia prohibits any language in any solicitation, bid or contract that is inconsistent with the July 21, 2011
Court Order in the case, Thompson Wrecking, Inc. v. Augusta Georgia; civil action No. 1:07-CV-0I9, Any such
language appearing in any Augusta, Georgia solicitation, bid or contract is void and unenforceable.
A copy of this Order can be reviewed at www.aueustttk'a.aov home page.
Thanks for doing business with us .. .
Geri A. Stairs, Procurement. Director
530 Greene Street, Room 605
Augusta, Georgia 30901
Bid 12 -205 Fort Gordon Gate 4 Booster Pump. Station
Page1of1
•
•
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
FORT GORDON GATE 4
BOOSTER PUMP STATION
PROJECT NO. ICU0068(FG- 88880003)
prepared for
AUGUSTA - RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Augusta, Georgia
The Honorable Deke S. Copenhaver, Mayor
Commissioners:
Matt Aitken
Corey Johnson
Joe Bowles
Alvin Mason
Bill Lockett
Joe Jackson
Jerry Brigham
Wayne Guilfoyle
J.R. Hatney
Grady Smith
Tom D. Wiedmeier
Director, Augusta Utilities Department
Augusta Utilities Department
360 Bay Street, Suite 180
Augusta, GA 30901
prepared by
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
ARCHITECTS ♦ ENGINEERS + LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, Georgia 30901
www.theJLAgroup.com
Volume 2 of 2
May 15, 2012 JLA Job No. 3042.1101
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATEI> DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking"
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications"
3. Section 099100 "Painting
1.3 DEFINITIONS
05/15 /012
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AW S symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and
show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and
supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify
pretensioned and slip- critical high-strength bolted connections.
1 :5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and fabricator.
13. Welding certificates.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG - 88880003)
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Shop primers.
3. Nonshrink grout.
1.6 QUALI'F'Y ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC - Certified Plant, Category STD.
13. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has completed a minimum of five (5) projects of
similar size and complexity. Reference project information to be submitted to the architect for
approval before Installer arrives on site.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.1 /DI.IM,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
05/15/012
1, AISC 303. ,
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members
and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owners testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
STRUCTURAL. STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.8 COORDINATION
05/15/012
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers` recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible
with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS
A. W- Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Channels, Angles, S- Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M,
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 /A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Weight Class: Standard, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.
E. Welding EIectrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High- Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type I, heavy -hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts;
and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type I , hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish.
13, Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
I. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy -hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type I, hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Plain Retain appropriate materials in first paragraph below or revise if other
materials are required. AISC uses the generic term "anchor rods" to include unheaded rods
and headed bolts and notes that "ASTM F 1554 is the preferred material specification for
anchor rods." Verify availability of ASTM F 1 554, Grade 55, weldable, before specifying.
Plate washers are used with oversized baseplate holes to resist nut pull - through and transfer
shear from baseplate to anchor rod.
C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 straight.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: • SSPC -Paint 25 BCS, Type I or Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPl 4I8, MPI #19, or SSPC -Paint 20
2.4 GROUT
I. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Plain.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy -hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
3. Finish: Plain.
05/15 /012
A. Metallic, Shrinkage- Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory - packaged, metallic aggregate grout,
mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30- minute working time.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage - Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory- packaged, nonmetallic aggregate
grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a
30- minute working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to
AMSC`s "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.
1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated.
2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high - strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings
until structural steel has been erected.
4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -
priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS 01.1/D1.1 M.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass
through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces Do not thermally out bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High- Strength Bolts: Shop install high - strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 /DI.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.7 Si-lOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members
to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high - strength bolted with slip - critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire - resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC -SP 6 /NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5
mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed
surfaces.
05/15/012
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200- 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
2.8 GALVANIZING
1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function
as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize members if indicated on the drawings.
05/15/012
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according
to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated
or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
C. Bolted Connections: Shop - bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using. ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop - welded connections will be tested and
inspected according to AWS Dl.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing
agency's option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM B 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM B 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry- bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
13. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No,ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3,2 PREPARATION
3.3 ERECTION
05/15/012
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and
bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303
and AISC 360.
B. Base Plates: Clean concrete surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to
setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug - tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do
not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly
finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions for shrinkage - resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent
contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
Fligh- Strength Bolts: Install high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG -.88880003)
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
05/15/012
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl.1ID1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high - strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts,"
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS DI.1 /D1.1M.
i. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1 /D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM B 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM B 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing
to comply with ASTM A 780.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for
touching up shop- painted surfaces.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC -SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC -SP 3 power -tool
cleaning.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. K- series steel joists.
2. Joist accessories.
B. Related Requirements:
1 Section 042000 "Unit Masonry"
1.3 DEFINITIONS
05/15/2012
A. SDI's "Specifications ": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support
nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's
"Specifications."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
13. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.
2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and
connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/1 5/2012
B. Welding certificates.
C. Manufacturer certificates.
D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.
E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying
with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications. Manufacturer's
responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists
to comply with performance requirements.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field - welding procedures and personnel according to
AWS DI. 1 /D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications. Protect joists from
corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling,
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into masonry construction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design
loads indicated.
1. Use ASD; data are given at service -load level.
2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live -load deflections no greater than
the following:
a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.2 K- SERIES STEEL JOISTS
05/15/2012
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web
Steel Joists, K- Series" in SDI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord
members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1. Joist Type: K- series steel joists.
B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
C. Do not camber joists.
D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Low- Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental
Chambers."
B. Primer: SSPC -Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC - Paint 15.
2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal bridging of material,
size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span.
Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability
B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal
Fabrications."
C. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6), carbon - steel, hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat,
unhardened steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
D. High - Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex
steel structural bolts;
1. Finish: Plain.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(F "G- 88880003)
G. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
05/15/2012
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories by a combination of hand -tool cleaning, SSPC -SP 2 and power -tool cleaning,
SSPC -SP 3.
B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film not less than l mil (0.025 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications, joist manufacturer's written recommendations,
and requirements in this Section.
1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
2. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure
with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 4
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and
prepare test and inspection reports.
B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1 /DI.IM.
C. Visually inspect bolted connections.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in
compliance with specified requirements.
E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime- painted joists and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning according to SSPC -SP 2, or power -tool
cleaning according to SSPC -SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 052100
05/15/2012
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/1 5/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof deck.
2. Non - composite form deck.
13. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete"
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing ".
3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications"
4. Section 099100 "Painting"
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
C. Product 'Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:
1. Power - actuated mechanical fasteners.
D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
STEEL DECKING 053100 - I
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Field quality - control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural
Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval
Guide, Building Materials" for Class I fire rating and Class 1 -90 windstorm ratings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
05/15/2012
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according
to MST's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural
Members."
Fire- Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency,
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
2. Epic Metals Corporation.
3. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
4. Nucor Com.; Vulcrait Group.
5. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling - Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(PG- 88880003)
B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top - flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the
following:
1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
G60 (2180) zinc coating.
2. Deck Profile: As indicated on the drawings
3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.
4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
5. Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Consolidated Systems, Inc.: Metal Dek Group.
2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
3. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.
4. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling - Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
B. Non - composite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed -steel sheet non- composite form -deck panels to
comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Non - composite Steel Form Deck," in
SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:
1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
060 (2180) zinc coating.
2. Profile Depth: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.
4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
5. Side Laps: Overlapped.
05/15/2012
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant, low - velocity, power- actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self - drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion- resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon -steel
screws, No. 10 (4.8 -mm) minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber.
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359 -inch (0.91 -m€n) design uncoated thickness, of same
material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication
No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.
G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 or MIL- P- 21035B, with dry film containing a
minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
05/15/2012
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection Iimitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side -lap interlocks.
13. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
I-I. Welding of deck to supports is not allowed.
I. Mechanical fasteners shall be used to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install
according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.
05/15/2012
3.3 ROOF -DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members with mechanical fasteners.
B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (914 Ilan),
and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8 -mm -) diameter or larger, carbon -steel
screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where
indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
complete closure.
3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor -deck panels to steel supporting members with mechanical fasteners.
B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches (914
mm), and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8 -mm -) diameter or larger, carbon -steel
screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Fasten steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure with mechanical fasteners.
E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z- closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight - fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of deck,
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected work with specified requirements.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 053100
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(PG- 88880003)
SECTION 054400 - COLD - FORMED METAL TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold - formed steel roof trusses.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold - formed steel trusses;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,
bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining
work.
C. Delegated- Design Submittal: For cold - formed steel trusses.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
05/15/2012
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified testing agency indicating steel sheet
complies with requirements, including base -metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength,
total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic- coating thickness.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1 /D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
COLD - FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG - 88880003)
2. AWS Dl .31D13M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
05/15/2012
A. Protect cold - formed steel trusses from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aegis Metal Framing.
2. Genesis Worldwide Inc.
3. Marino /WARE.
4. Nuconsteel, A Nucor Company.
5. Steel Construction Systems.
6. TrusSteel: an ITW company.
7. USA Frametek.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, to design cold - formed steel
framing.
13. Structural Performance: Provide cold - formed steel trusses capable of withstanding design loads
within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: Per IBC 2006 and ASCE -7.
2. Deflection Limits: Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater
than the following:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside
the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure,
connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects
when subject to a maximum ambient. temperature change of 120 deg F.
C. Cold - Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1. Roof Systems: Design according to AISI 5210.
2. Lateral Design: Design according to AISI S213.
3. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI S214.
COLD - FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.3 COLD - FORMED STEEL TRUSS MATERIALS
I . Grade: ST33H minimum or as required by structural design.
2. Coating: G90.
2.4 ROOF TRUSSES
2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
05/15/2012
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003 /A 1003M, structural grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped or special shaped steel sections.
1. Connecting Flange Width: 1 -5/8 inches, minimum at top and bottom chords connecting
to sheathing or other directly fastened construction.
2. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
3. Section Properties: As required by structural design.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel - framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, structural grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for truss members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration unless otherwise
indicated.
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex- headed bolts and carbon -
steel nuts; and flat., hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with allowable load or
strength design capacities calculated according to ICC -ES AC193 and Appendix D in ACI 318,
greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by
a qualified testing agency.
D. Power- Actuated Fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for application, fabricated from
corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, allowable load
capacities calculated according to ICC -1S AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion- resistant - coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
steel drill screws.
COLD - FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. I-Iead Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 or MIL- P- 21035B.
B. Shims: Load bearing, of high - density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching; or of cold - formed
steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold- formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate trusses using jigs or templates.
2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold - formed steel truss members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator.
a. Comply with AWS Dl.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
4. Fasten other materials to cold - formed steel trusses by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin
fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace trusses to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift
fabricated trusses to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold - formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-
square tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Examine supporting substrates and abutting cold - formed steel trusses for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting. performance of the Work.
COLD - FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
A. Install, bridge, and brace cold- formed steel trusses according to AISI S200, AISI 5214, AISI's
"Code of Standard Practice for Cold- Formed Steel Structural Framing," and manufacturer's
written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Install cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by welding or mechanical fasteners.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 /DI.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings; comply with
requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
C. Install temporary bracing and supports. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed,
until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to
framing are secured.
D. Truss Spacing: As indicated on the drawings.
E. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses.
F. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately
position at spacings indicated.
G. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections.
H. Coordinate with wall framing to align webs of bottom chords and load - bearing studs or
continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing
points.
I. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and
designed according to CFSEI's TechNote 551e, "Design Guide: Permanent Bracing of Cold -
Formed Steel Trusses."
J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold - formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finishing materials.
COLD- FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU -0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special
inspections:
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
05/15/2012
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold - formed metal trusses are without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054400
COLD- FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications:
05/15/2012
1. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
2. Loose steel lintels.
3. Shelf and relieving angles
4. Miscellaneous framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other sections.
5. Miscellaneous steel trim and edgings.
6. Pipe Bollards.
7. Field surface preparation and field touch -up_
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 042000 "Concrete Unit Masonry"
2. Section 052100 "Structural Steel"
3. Section 099100 "fainting"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections.
13. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for
installation under other Sections.
. Show method and details of bracing, including type and size of members and
connections to be used, for all roof penetrations that are 12 inches or greater in diameter.
C. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 -
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG - 88880003)
05/15/2012
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project
name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified,
1,4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance, and with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS 01.1 "Structural Welding
Code -- Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural
Welding Code—Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal
fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal fabrications to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure
continuity of installation.
1. At delivery and prior to unloading, examine all steel for signs of thin or no shop primer.
If shop- primed steel has numerous signs of improper packing, handling, or preparation,
as evidenced by numerous breaks, chips, scratches, and heavily rusted areas in the shop
primer, do not accept the steel. Where existing primer appears to be thin as evidenced by
shadows or variegated appearance, or rust bloom, check thickness of primer with a
magnetic thickness tester such as a Positester.
2. If unloaded, staged, or erected shop - primed steel is found to have low shop- primer as
described above, the Contractor shall be responsible for bringing the required surface
preparation and priming to bring the shop primer thickness to the specified dry film
thickness, even if the steel is erected.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.7 SEQUENCING
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
05/15/2012
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Handle and protect steel members and
packaged materials from damage, corrosion, and deterioration. Do not erect rust steel.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become
dry or rusty before use.
2. Stack in such a manner that surface water will properly drain. If materials are to be
stored for an extended period of time, cover in such a way that rain will not fall on the
material, but air will flow freely through the stack.
3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
4. Store steel so as to be protected from mud and dirt. Remove all traces of mud and dirt
prior to erecting. Mud and dirt shall be removed carefully to prevent damage to the
primer.
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying
the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for
installation.
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface
blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names, or roughness.
C. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion- resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a
safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM F 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron
or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip
galvanized per ASTM A 153.
D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy
to be welded.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.2 PAINT
2.3 FASTENERS
05/15/2012
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and
capability of providing a sound foundation for field - applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure. Compatible with finish paint specified in Section 099000 - Painting. Capable
of being applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils DFT and cover surface
profile created by surface preparation. Shop primer is to be by the same manufacturer as
the finish coat. Cross coating is not permitted.
A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
electrodeposited zinc coating, Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.
1. All fasteners in an exterior application or that are in contact with wood or cementitious
materials shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A, with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563, and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3.
D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
B. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1.
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI I318.22.1.
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.4 GROUT
1. Material: Carbon steel components zinc - plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5,
2. Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless -steel bolts and nuts complying with
ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.
I. Toggle Bolts: FS PP -B -588, tumble -wing type, class and style as required.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- &8880003)
05/15/2012
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, non- staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1 107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than
that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated
or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Galvanize all ferrous metal
1. Used for exterior applications
C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
D, Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent
buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design
calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime
sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F.
E. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
F. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
G. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
H. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that
no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those
adjacent.
METAL, FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
I. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-
head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
J. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
K. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as. indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
M. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.6 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing
area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
13. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
05/15/2012
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of 1 inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches
bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of
structural steel framework as required to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent
construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates,
and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and
tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6
Foil Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into
masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum
anchor units in the form of steel straps 1 -1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8
inches long.
2.9 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B. Base Plate: 3 /8- inch - thick steel base plates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill base plates at all
four corners for 3/4 -inch anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle base plates for plumb
alignment of bollards.
C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in-
Place Concrete" for normal - weight, air - entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day
compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated
2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designing finishes.
13. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Hot -dip galvanize all ferrous metal in exterior locations, in exterior walls, and in contact with
cementitious or masonry construction, or with treated wood.
2.11 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces not galvanized except the following:
I. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high- strength bolted with slip - critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed -on fireproofing.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
6. Faying surfaces.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill
scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Shop Priming
a. Where indicated
b. All steel that will be exposed to weather or to frequent moist conditions.
05/15/2012
with requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:.
I. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113): SSPC -SP 2 "Solvent Cleaning." followed by SSPC -SP 6
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" for metals to be galvanized, and metals scheduled for
exterior use ."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC -SP 2 "Solvent Cleaning." followed by SSPC -SP 3
"Power Tool Cleaning."
1, Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC -PA l "Paint Application
Specification No. I" for shop painting. Apply shop primer to cover profile of surface
preparation.
2. Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less
than 3.0 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges,
and exposed surfaces.
3. Do not allow prepared and cleaned surfaces to remain unprimed over night or for longer
than 8 hours before priming. Surfaces not primed within these parameters shall be
recleaned prior to priming.
4. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, rivets, welds, and edges. Spray all Bolts and rivets
from at least 4 different angles. Cover all sides of rivets and bolts equally. •
5. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
D. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot -dip
process complying with the following requirements. If not indicated, then galvanize all ferrous
metals exposed to moisture or weather, and that are in contact with wood, masonry, or
cementitious materials:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products
made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch
thick or thicker.
3. Galvanize steel and fasteners in the following conditions:
4. Prepare all surfaces to be galvanized according to SSPC SP6 — Commercial Blast,
E. Steel that arrives on site with rusted or damaged surfaces may be inferred as improper handling,
surface preparation, or shop priming and will be corrected at the fabricator's expense or may be
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
rejected if rusting is excessive. The General Contractor shall be responsible for aII steel that is
accepted with rusting or damaged surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from
water and concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction. Include threaded
fasteners for concrete and masony inserts, toggle bolts, through- bolts, lag bolts, wood screws,
and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete
masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop- welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Shelf Angles:
I . Attach shelf angles to structural members. Do not attach shelf angles to steel studs.
2. Break shelf angles at all corners where building expansion joints and masonry control
joints will be installed. Do not extend shelf angle through expansion and control joints.
F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No,ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that
no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those
adjacent.
G. Roof Penetration Framing: Provide and install permanent bracing and supports around all roof
penetrations that are 12 inches in diameter or greater.
J. Pipe Bollards
3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
05/15/2012
1. Anchor bollards to existing construction with post installed anchors and bolts. Provide
four 3/4 -inch anchors at each bollard, unless otherwise indicated. Embed anchors at
least 4 inches in existing concrete.
2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to form a cone. Finish to a
smooth trowel finish.
L. Back Priming: For all unprimed steel and steel with damaged primer or galvanizing, back
prime, including all edges and concealed surfaces, of all ferrous and galvanized metal prior to
installation. Apply primer to the same specifications as for the exposed surfaces. Treat all cut
edges, end cuts, welds, and otherwise disturbed surfaces in the same way. Ferrous items shall
be completely encapsulated with primer. Installed items not back- primed shall be removed,
properly primed, and reinstalled at the Contractor's expense. Damaged materials shall be
replaced. This provision applies to all ferrous and galvanized steel that is installed in exterior
locations, in unconditioned spaces, and that are in contact with wood or cementitious materials.
However, do not prime faying surfaces, surfaces that are to receive sprayed fire proofing, or
other scheduled or noted surfaces not to be primed. Comply with surface preparation and
priming specified in Section 09900 -- Painting.
1. Protect primed and finished steel that is in contact with masonry and cementitious
surfaces from abrasion and corrosion caused by alkali action. Protection shall not
interfere with rigidity of installation.
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges
or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
METAL .FABRICATIONS 055000 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and primer damaged during handling and erection. Apply paint to
exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. Perform all surface preparation
and priming as described for shop performed surface preparation and priming in Part 2 of this
specification.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
05/15/2012
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. Perform all surface preparation as
described for shop performed surface preparation in Part 2 of this specification.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 11
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with timber.
3. Framing with engineered wood products.
4. Shear wall panels.
5. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
6. Wood blocking and nailers.
7. Wood furring.
8. Wood sleepers.
9. Utility shelving.
10. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061063 "Exterior Rough Carpentry" for elevated decks and other exterior
construction made of wood.
2. Section 061323 "Heavy Timber Framing."
3. Section 061600 "Sheathing."
4, Section 061753 "Shop - Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from dimension
lumber,
5. Section 313116 "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood
framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
C. 'Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.
05/15/2012
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.IC1.J- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
B. Fastener Patterns: Full -size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.
I.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES:
1. Wood - preservative- treated wood.
2. Fire - retardant- treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Shear panels.
5. Power - driven fasteners.
6. Powder- actuated fasteners.
7. Expansion anchors.
8. Metal framing anchors.
05/15/2012
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory - fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood- preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire- retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire- retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU - 0068 (PG - 88880003)
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire -
retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber fiat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
1. Dimension lumber framing.
2. Miscellaneous Iumber.
B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, Provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules - writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
I . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD - PRESERVATIVE- TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
13. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Spruce- pine -fir (south) or spruce - pine -fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and Hailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling.
2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment: Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,
not less than 314 -inch (19 -mm) nominal thickness.
2.5 FASTENERS
05/15/2012
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power- Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
05/15/2012
E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1, Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group I or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade Al or
A4).
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized - asphalt compound, bonded to a high - density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6
mm).
B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Water - Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and - accepted formulation containing 3- iodo -2-
propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
13. Framing Standard: Comply with AF &PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
33 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION 061 000
05 /1 5/2012
C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to emu; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels.
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure - preservative- treated, key - beveled lumber not
less than 1 -1 /2 i nelles (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron- treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA- registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -
registered label.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 072014 - FOAMED -IN -PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
05/15/2012
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by provisions of this section.
B. Applications of insulation specified in this section include the following:
1. Foamed -In -Place masonry insulation for thermal, sound and fire resistance values.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product and technical presentation as provided by the manufacturer.
B. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing
compliance with specified performance values, including R- values, fire performance and sound
abatement characteristics.
C. Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit Material Safety Data Sheet complying with OSHA
Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CRF 1910 1200.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide insulation produced by a single and approved manufacturer.
The product must come from the manufacturer pre -mixed to ensure consistency.
13. Installer Qualifications for Foamed -hi -Place Masonry Insulation: Engage an experienced
dealer /applicator who has been trained and licensed by the product manufacturer and
which has not less than three years direct experience in the installation of the product used.
C. Warranty: Upon request, a one year product and installation warranty will be issued by both the
manufacturer and installer.
D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose
fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a
part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
Product must be classified by Underwriters Laboratory (10 ( "UL ") as to Surface Burning
Characteristics
Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E -119
FOAMED-IN-PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION 072014 -1
3.2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
Surface Burning Characteristics:
Combustion Characteristics:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers of Foamed -In -Place Masonry Insulation: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products from the following:
a. "Core -Fill 500TM "; Tailored Chemical Products, P.O. Drawer 4186, Hickory, N.C. 28603,
(800) 627 -1687
No substitutions allowed.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
ASTM E -84
ASTM E -136
05/15/2012
A. General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for materials,
compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics.
B. Foamed -In -Place Masonry Insulation: Two component thermal insulation produced by combining
a plastic resin and catalyst foaming agent surfactant which, when properly ratioed and mixed,
together with compressed air produce a cold - setting foam insulation in the hollow cores of hollow
unit masonry walls.
1. Fire- Resistance Ratings: Minimum four (4) hour fire resistance wall rating (ASTM E -119)
for 8" and 12" concrete masonry units when used in standard two (2) hour rated CMUs.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread, smoke developed and fuel
contributed of 0, 5 and 0 respectively.
3. Combustion Characteristics: Must be noncombustible, Class A building material.
4. Thermal Values: "R" Value of 4,91 /inch ® 32 degrees F mean; ASTM C -177.
5. Sound Abatement: Minimum Sound Transmission CIass ( "STC ") rating of 53 and a
minimum Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class ( "OITC ") rating of 44 for 8" wall assembly
(ASTM E 90 -90).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Application Assemblies:
Block- Walls: 6 ", 8 ", 10" or 12" concrete masonry units
Cavity Walls: 2" cavity or greater
INSTALLATION OF FOAMED -IN -PLACE INSULATION
FOAMED -IN -PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION 072014 -2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
A. General: Install foamed -in -place insulation from interior, or as specified, prior to installation of
interior finish work and after all masonry and structural concrete work is in place; comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Installation: Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry walls where shown on
drawings. The foam insulation shall be pressure injected through a series of 5/8" to 7/8" holes
drilled into every vertical column of block cells (every 8" on center) beginning at an approximate
height of four (4) feet from finished floor level. Repeat this procedure at an approximate height of
ten (10) feet above the first horizontal row of holes (or as needed) until the void is completely
filled. Patch holes with mortar and score to resemble existing surface.
END OF SECTION 072014
FOAMED -IN -PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION 072014 -3
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(1 G- 88880003)
SECTION 072100 — THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. HCFC FREE Polyisocyanurate Rigid board type roof insulation(s) for thermal protection as part
of roofing assemblies.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
• A. Section 05 30 00 - Metal Decking.
• B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Roof blocking and nailers.
1.3 REFERENCES
+ ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation
Board.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
• LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) is defined as using techniques from ASTM C1303 or
CAN /ULC -S770, the predicted R -Value that has been shown to be equivalent to the average
performance of a permeably faced foam insulation product over 15 years. I TTR applies to ALL
foam insulation products with blowing agents other than air, such as polyiso, extruded
polystyrene and polyurethane. The new method is based on consensus standards in the US and
Canada.
1.5 SUBM.1'I'TALS
05/15/2012
• A. Product Data:
o 1. Manufacturer's specifications
2. Installation instructions for insulation board and fasteners
3. Product Data as per ASTM 2129 -- 01 Standard for Data Collection for Sustainability
Assessment of Building Products
• B. Samples:
a
1. Submit 6 by 6 inch (152 by 152 mm) samples of each board type required.
2. Submit samples of each fastener type required.
• C. Shop Drawings: Roof plan showing layout of boards and fastening patterns.
+ D. Certificates: System Manufacturer's or insulation manufacturer's certification that the
insulation meets Zero ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) and Zero GWP (Global Warming
Potential) specification requirements.
• E. Thermal Warranty: Submit sample warranty indicating conditions and limitations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(P0- 88880003)
• A.. Regulatory Requirements:
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
o 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
o 3. Factory Mutual (FM).
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
• A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Atlas Roofing Corporation,
Atlas Roofing Corporation,
2000 RiverEdge Pkwy, Suite 800, Atlanta, GA 30328.
Ph. (770) 952 -1442
Fax (770) 952 -3170
• B. Provide polyiso roof board insulation from a single manufacturer.
• A. Polyiso Roof Board Insulation: Provide products that comply with the following:
o I . ASTM standards specified.
2. Factory Mutual (FM) approvals specified.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) classifications specified.
• Federal Specification FIH- I- 1972/GEN has been cancelled
• ASTM C 1289, Type V
05/15/2012
• A. Deliver insulation in packages labeled with material name, thermal value and product code.
• B. When stored outdoors, stack insulation on pallets above ground or roof deck and cover with
tarpaulin or other suitable waterproof coverings. Slit or remove manufacturer's packaging before
covering with waterproof covering.
• A. Comply with insurance underwriter's requirements applicable for products of this Section.
• B. Do not install insulation on roof deck when water of any type is present. Do not apply roofing
materials when substrate is damp or wet.
• 13. AC Foam Nail Base: Closed -cell HCFC FREE "Green" polyisocyanurate foam board
manufactured using 1 -ICFC blowing agent and bonded to 7/16 inch thick APA/TECO rated OSB
on the top side and a fiber- reinforced felt facer on the bottom; for use with metal roofing;
compressive strength - 20 psi.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
• IBC, NBC, UBC and SBC Sections on Foam Insulation (Chapter 26)
• FHA minumum property requirements
• ARMA insulated deck requirements
• APA/TECO rated OSB nailable surface
• C. LTTR - Insulation "R" Value: =6 Long -term thermal resistance values of the foam were
determined in accordance with CAN /ULC -S770. All test samples were third - party selected and
tested by an accredited materials testing laboratory.
• D. Related Materials:
o 1. Fasteners: Factory Mutual approved.
2. Base Ply: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
1 Fasteners: For Nail Base and Vented -R: Atlas Nail Base Fasteners.
4. Asphalt Bitumen: Comply with ASTM D 312, Type III (steep) or Type IV. USE
ONLY ON APPROVED BOARD INSULATION TYPES.
a. Provide with labels indicating flash point, softening point, finished blowing
temperature, and equiviscous temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
05/15 /2012
• A. Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and
free of foreign material that will damage insulation or impede installation.
• B. Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof
accessories are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Drawings and
submittals.
• C. Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers, materials and equipment without
damaging or deforming work.
o 1. Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing deck surfaces.
3.2 APPLICATION / INSTALLATION
• A. Install specified insulation using approved mechanical fasteners or adhesives in accordance
with manufacturer's latest written instructions and as required by governing codes and Owner's
insurance carrier.
• B. Install with end joints staggered to avoid having insulation joints coinciding with joints in
deck. In multi -layer installations, stagger joints in top and bottom layers.
3.3 CLEANING / PROTECTION
s A. Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface prior to application of roofing
membrane.
• B. Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover and waterproof with completed
roof system immediately after installation.
o 1. Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day.
2. Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or damaged with new
insulation.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(1 =G- 88880003)
05/15/2012
• C. Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use of protective covering materials
during and after installation
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 074113 - TEE -PANEL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANEL
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed, prefinished metal roofing and (lashings.
B. Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, and accessories.
C. Sealant
D. Fastening devices.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07631: Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters.
C. Section 07900: Sealants.
05/15/2012
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold formed Steel Structural
Members.
B. ASTM A -653 & ASTM A924 Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized)
C. ASTM E -I646
D. ASTM E -1680
E. Spec Data Sheet - Galvalume Sheet Metal by Bethlehem Corp.
F. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
G. Building Materials Directory - Underwriter's Laboratories, Test Procedure 580.
1.4 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys, hips,
ridges, eaves, corners, rakes, miscellaneous flashing and attaching devices.
TEE - PANEL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANEL 074113 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(PG- 88880003)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels, anchoring details, joint details, trim, flashing,
and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing , terminations, and penetrations of metal work.
B. Submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with factory finish.
C. Submit results indicating compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance
tests:
1. Air Infiltration ASTM E -I680
2. Water Infiltration ASTM El 646
3. Wind Uplift - U.L.90
D. Submit calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method
resists wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten (10) years
minimum experience.
B. No product substitutions shall be permitted without meeting specifications.
C. Substitutions shall be submitted 10 Days prior to Bid Date and acceptance put forth in an
addendum.
D. No substitutions shall be made after the Bid Date.
1.8 WARRANTY
05/15/2012
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and
completeness.
B. Panels should be stored in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow moisture to run
off.
C. Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun.
D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.
A. Paint finish shall have a twenty year guarantee against cracking, peeling and fade (not to exceed 5
N.B.S. units).
TEE- PANEL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANEL 074113 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
B. Galvalume material shall have a twenty year guarantee against failure due to corrosion, rupture or
perforation.
C. Applicator shall furnish guarantee covering water tightness of the roofing system for the period of
two (2) years from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas.
B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified requirements.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Prefinished Metal shall be Hot- Dipped Galvanized - ASTM A446 -85 Grade C G90 Coating A525-
86 24 Gauge core steel or prefinished Galvalume - ASTM 792 -86 AZ -55.
B. Unfinished Metal shall be Grade C Galvalume ASTM A792 -86, AZ 55, "Satin Finish ".
C. Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating, applied by the manufacturer on a
continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 nail over 0.25 to 0.35
mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated
with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion,
flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier.
D. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during
fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Galvanized Steel with washers where required.
B. Vinyl Weatherseal Insert.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof panels.
B. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, 1/2 inch.
2.5 BERRIDGE STANDING SEAM TEE -PANEL
TEE- PANEL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANEL 074113 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Panels shall have 12 3/4" on- center seam spacing with a seam height of 1 ".
2. Panels shall be site - formed with the Berridge Model SS -14 Portable Roll Former in
continuous lengths from eave to ridge or factory fabricated to 40' max.
3. Snap -on seams shall be 1" in height and shall contain the Berridge factory - applied Extruded
Vinyl Weather Seal Insert (Patent No. 4641475) to prevent siphoning of moisture through
the standing seam.
4. Concealed anchor clips shall be spaced as required to meet uplift loads (maximum of 24" on
center).
5. When required, Panel assembly shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories Label UL90, pursuant
to Construction Number 296 and applicable Fire Ratings.
6. Certification shall be submitted, based on independent testing laboratory, indicating no
measurable water penetration or air leakage beyond allowable tolerances through the system
when tested in accordance with ASTM E -331 -86 and 13- 283 -84.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Substrate
05/15/2012
1. Examine plywood or metal deck to ensure proper attachment to framing.
2. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves or
projections, level to +/- 1/4" in 20', and properly sloped to [valleys] (or) [eaves].
3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant
strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
4. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Flutes in steel deck to be clean and dry or [joints
in wood deck to be solidly supported and nailed].
B. Underlayment
1. Install WR Grace "Ice and Water Shield" underlayment over solid sheathing and fastened in
place.
2. Ensure that all nail heads are totally flush with the substrate. Nails shall be galvanized
roofing nails with Berridge Coated Felt Caps.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight
installation.
B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb.
C. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels.
TEE - PANEL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANEL 074113 4
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of roof panels.
E. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
F. Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on shop drawings.
G. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.
H. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards.
I. Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until
completion of installation.
J. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
3.4 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Final inspection will be performed by a Architect during punchlist.
END OF SECTION
05/1 5 /2012
TEE-PANEL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANEL 074113 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(PG- 88880003)
SECTION 074213 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal soffit panels.
13. Related Sections:
1. Section 074113 "Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel" for lap - seam metal roof panels.
1.3 PRE1NSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,
_joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not
less than 1 -1:2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory - applied color
finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - I
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Metal Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal panel accessories.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
B. UL- Certified, Portable Roll - Forming Equipment: UL- certified, portable roll - forming
equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as
factory- formed products, Maintain UL certification of portable roll- forming equipment for
duration of work.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof cave and soffit as shown on Drawings; approximately by
full cave width, including attachments and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
05/15/2012
A Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
water, Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
05/15/2012
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal,
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 3
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one -half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfin/sq. ft. (03 Us per sq. m) when tested
according to ASTM E 283 at the following test - pressure difference:
1. Test- Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf /sq. ft. (75 Pa).
C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test - pressure difference:
1. Test - Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf /sq. ft. (137 Pa).
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening, of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
05/15/2012
A. General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting
side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using
concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal roof panels.
2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
B. Flush - Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid and Perforated panels formed with vertical panel edges
and a flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. AB' Span: a R1ueScoLe Steel com an
b. Architectural Building Components.
c. ATAS International, Inc.
d. 13crridce'Malulfacturing Conmanv.
e. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 4
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
f Dimensional Metals. Inc.
g. L;n dert. Inc.
h. Fa brat,
i. Firestone Metal Products. LLC.
j. Innovative Metals Company. Inc.
k. MBCf: a division of Net Building Systems. L.P.
1. McElroy Metal. Inc.
m. Merchant 4 Evans Inc.
n. Metal -Fab Manufacturine,
o. Metal Sales {Manufacturing Corporation.
p. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
q. Ultra Seam. Inc.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
05/15 /2012
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold - formed, metallic- coated
steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, 090 (Z275 hot -dip galvanized) coating designation or
ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum- zinc -alloy coating designation
unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support
and alignment of metal panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin -foam or
closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim
with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self - tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory - applied
coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with
panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
I. Sealant Tape: Pressure- sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, . nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl- Rubber - Based, Solvent - Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.4 FABRICATION
05/15/2012
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B. On -Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may
be fabricated on -site using UL- certified, portable roll - forming equipment if panels are of same
profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory - formed panels. Fabricate
according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
2.5 FINISHES
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal soffit panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 6
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU-0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than
70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light -
colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
3. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than
70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
•performance of the Work.
1. Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking
and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water - resistive barriers been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with
requirements for assemblies indicated.
3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and Iocations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 7
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self - tapping screws.
Do not begin installation until air- or water - resistive barriers and flashings that will be
concealed by metal panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition.
7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit - penetrating panels.
13. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
C. Lap -Seam Metal Panels; Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
I. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.
2. Provide metal- backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side
of metal panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of
washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
D. Watertight Installation:
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using
sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting -type panels and
elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152 -mm) end lap, sealed with sealant
and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
I. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, corners,
seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types
recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
F. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that are permanently watertight.
I. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 in) with no joints allowed within 24
inches (f 1() mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,
not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant.
C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213
METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND GUTTERS
PART] - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1: Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood milers, curbs, and blocking.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and Locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,
joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 PREINSTALLA'I'ION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof - penetration flashing, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
05/15/2012
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each manuthctured product and accessory.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and gutters.
05/15/2012
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field - assembled work.
3. I.ncIude identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location
in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion joint covers, including showing
direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counteiflashings as applicable.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than ! -1 /2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with
factory- applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) Long by actual width of unit, including
finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other
attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and
other exposed accessories.
3. Unit -Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full -size Sample.
4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color
required.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS •
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in- service performance.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and
trim installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory - applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5Punter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing, gutters and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" •requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3
•
Tort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg 1= (67 deg C), ambient.
2.2 SHEET METALS
05/15/2012
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc- coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat.
2. Exposed Coil- Coated Finish:
a. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light- colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High - Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a
slip - resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene -film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or
SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; specifically designed to withstand
high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide prier according to written
recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.- Conn.; Grace Ice and
Water Shield Ultra.
b. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
c. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra S.A.
d. Metal -Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlaynient.
f. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT.
g. Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT.
h. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA -HT.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg (116 deg C) or
higher.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3. Low- Temperature Flexibility: ASTM 1) 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29
deg C) or lower.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self- locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex - washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory - applied coating. Provide metal - backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High - strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot -dip
galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
3. Fasteners for Zinc Sheet:. Series 300 stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape
112 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single - component, solvent - release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM I3 1187.
G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and
trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3 -mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1, Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion -type joints are required, form metal to provide
for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard
for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured,
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -Iock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,
and solder.
I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6 ROOF - DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96- inch- (2400-mm-) long sections.
Furnish flat -stock gutter brackets and flat -stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same
metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG - 88880003)
than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers, gutter bead
reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
1. Gutter Profile: As indicated on drawings.
2. Expansion Joints: Lap type.
3. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm): Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered
elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors and Shop
fabricate elbows.
2:7 STEEP -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper 16 oz,/sq. IL (0.55 mm thick).
B. Valley Flashing Fabricate from the following.materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft. (0.55 rnm thick).
C. Eave, Rake, Ridge, andHip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water - resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self - adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not
less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side
edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment
within 14 days.
B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment directly on substrate before installing sheet
metal flashing and trim.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
05 /15/2012
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners(, solder], protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal
flashing and trim system.
I. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure - treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of
corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than I -1/4
inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws .
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. Use sealant - filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than I inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal
sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4
and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -
type joints at temperatures below 40 deg t: (4 deg C).
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
G. Soldered Joints: CIean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges
of sheets with solder to width of I-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre - tinning where pre -
tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not use torches for soldering.
2. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
3. Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel
and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.
Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and
neutralization.
4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.
5. Copper -Clad Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for
copper -clad stainless steel.
3.4 ROOF - DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof- drainage items to produce complete roof- drainage system
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of
roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion.
Attach gutters at cave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal
watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
l . Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.
2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat.
3. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24
inches (600 mm) apart.
4. Anchor gutter with spikes and ferrules spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm)apart.
5. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feel
(15.24 m) apart. Install expansion joint caps.
6. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
05/15/2012
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean
finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain
sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
13. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 10
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 076500 - FLEXIBLE FLASHING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Flexible flashing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For products indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of flexible flashing, including plans and elevations. Include the
following:
1. Identify material widths, and location in Project.
2. Details for sequence, width, joining, supporting, and attachments to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Verification: As indicated below.
1. Flexible Flashing:
2. Accessories
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose
work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of
roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof - mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to flexible flashing.
3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
4. Document proceedings, including connective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
1.4 TECHNICAL DATA
05/15/2012
A. Applicable Standards: American Society for Testing & Materials
1. ASTM C836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid - Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course.
2. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers
and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension.
3. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
Flexible Flashing 076500 - 1
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
4. ASTM D903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds.
5. ASTM D1876 Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T -Peel Test)
6. ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
7. ASTM D3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurement of Dimensions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver flexible flashing materials undamaged. Protect flexible flashing materials during
transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install flexible flashing materials in a manner to prevent damage.
1.6 COORDINATION
05/15/2012
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store flexible flashing materials in contact with other materials that might
cause rips, tears, or other surface damage.
A. Coordinate installation of flexible flashing with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a leakproof, and secure installation.
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: Grace Vycor Plus Self-Adhering Flashing
manufactured by W.R. Grace .& Co. — Conn., Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA.
(800) 444 -6459, Fax (800) 784 -8569, www.gcp- grace.com
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vycor Plus Self - Adhering Flashing is a 25 mil (0.63 mm), cold applied, self-adhering
membrane consisting of a 3 mil (0.07 mm) high density, cross laminated polyethylene film
coated on one side with a 22 mil (0.56 mm) layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive. For ease of
application, the rolls are interwound with a disposable silicone coated release sheet. The
flashing is a dark gray- black. In addition, the rolls have an integrated Ripcord that enables
proper integration between the flashing membrane (Vycor Plus) and the other elements of the
wall - also called weather resistive barriers (such as housewraps, felts, building paper).
1. Thickness ASTM D3767 Method A 25 mils (0.063 mm)
2. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D1970 Unaffected at —45 F ( -43 C)
3. Elongation per ASTM D412 200% Minimum
4. Cracked Cycling 100 cycles per ASTM C836 Unaffected at —25 F ( -32 C)
5. Lap Adhesion ASTM D1876 Modified Min. Temp. 60 plf (875 N /m) width
6. Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D903 Min. Temp. 60 plf (875 N /m) width
Flexible Flashing 076500 - 2
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
05/15/2012
A. PERM -A- BARRIER® WB Primer Surface Conditioner is recommended when the Vycor Plus
Flashing does not adhere properly to the substrate. PERM -A- BARRIER® WB Primer Surface
Conditioner is a water based formula that imparts an aggressive, high tack finish to treated
substrate. It is a milky white product that is packaged ready to use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPERATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, and free of voids, spalled areas, loose
substrate, loose nails, other sharp protrusions or other matter that will hinder the adhesion
or regularity of the flashing installation.
2. Clean loose dust or dirt from the substrate wherever Vycor Plus Self - Adhered Flashing is
to be applied by wiping with a clean dry cloth or brush.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Evironmental Conditions: Vycor Plus Self - Adhered Flashing cannot be applied to moist or
damp surfaces. After precipitation, allow a minimum of 24 hours for drying before installing
the flashing. Vycor Plus Self - Adhered Flashing can be applied only in air and surface
temperature of 25 degrees F ( -4 degrees C) and above.
3.3 APPLICATION METHODS
A. Primer Surface Conditioner: It is recommended that PERM -A- BARRIER Surface Conditioner
be used if it is difficult to adhere the flashing to the substrate.
1. PERM -A- BARRIER WB Primer Surface Conditioner is packaged ready -to -use. It will
cover approximately 300 sf/gal (7.5 m /L) when applied with a low pressure, portable
sprayer.
2. Allow surface conditioner to dry completely, approximately 1 hour depending on weather
conditions, before application of flashing.
3. Excess surface conditioner will not improve the adhesion of the flashing. The surface
conditioner is considered dry when the substrate returns to its original color, minimum 1
hour.
4. If conditioned areas are not covered that day, recondition area if there is significant dust
or dirt contamination.
B. Flashing Installation: Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall - opening
components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
Flexible Flashing 076500 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
Flexible Flashing
05/15/2012
1. Cut Vycor Plus Self - Adhered Flashing into appropriate lengths. If required, and as
familiarity with the installation increases, the flashing can be installed in continuous
fashion.
2. Peel release paper from the roll to expose rubberized asphalt and position flashing to
center over joint location before applying.
3. Move along opening or joint, being careful to put flashing as evenly as possible over the
opening and avoiding fish- mouths along the edges. Press firmly into place with a hand
roller as soon as possible, to ensure continuous and intimate contact with the substrate.
4. If wrinkles develop, carefully cut out affected area and replace in the similar procedure
outlined above. The repair piece also must be pressed into place with a hand roller as
soon as possible to ensure continuous and intimate contact with the substrate.
5. Vycor Plus Self - Adhered Flashing must be continuously supported by the substrate and
must not span or bridge joints, gaps or voids in excess of 1/4" (6.4 mm) End laps that
occur in subsequent lengths must maintain a minimum overlap of 2" (51mm).
C. Flashing should be installed in accordance with ASTM E2112
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Vycor Plus Self - Adhered Flashing must be protected from damage from other trades or
construction materials.
END OF SECTION 076500
076500 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Polysulfide joint sealants.
4. Latex joint sealants.
5. Solvent - release -curing joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Arrange for tests to take place with joint - sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- (150 -mm -)
long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint- Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint - sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint - sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint - sealant formulation.
4. Joint - sealant color.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
05/15/2012
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint - sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
05/15/2012
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint - sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single- Component, Nonsag, Neutral - Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Coming Corporation; 790.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290.
d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.
e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil -C990.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
B. Single- Component, Nonsag, Neutral- Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50.
b. Dow Coming Corporation; 756 SMS 791 795 995.
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800 SilPruf NB SCS9000
SilPruf SCS2000 UltraPruf II SCS2900.
d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295.
e. Pecora Corporation; 864.
f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -641.
g. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil -C995.
h. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
C. Single- Component, Nonsag, Neutral - Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; U1traGlaze SSG4000.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -631.
e. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG.
D. Single - Component, Nonsag, Acid - Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 1200.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 999 -A.
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Contractors SCS1000 .
d. May National Associates, Inc.; Sil 100 GC.
e. Pecora Corporation; 860.
f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -601.
g. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM5732 Polyglaze.
h. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze.
E. Single- Component, Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 NS.
c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS 311 NS.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.
F. Single- Component, Pourable, Traffic - Grade, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100 /50, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890 -SL.
b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 SG.
c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL.
05/15/2012
G. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Neutral - Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 4TS.
H. Mildew - Resistant, Single - Component, Nonsag, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.
I. Mildew - Resistant, Single - Component, Acid - Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Ornniplus.
b. Dow Coming Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.
e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single- Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - I5LM.
b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921 Dymonic FC.
B. Single - Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 50, for Use NT.
a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto -Thane 230 LM Type II.
b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -901.
05/15/2012
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
C. Single- Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 900.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 25.
d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto -Thane 230 Type IL
e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I -XL.
f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000.
g. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100 Permathane SM7110.
h. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - la.
i. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic.
D. Single- Component, Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 1.
b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 40 FC.
c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto -Thane 230 Type II.
d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - la.
e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.
E. Single- Component, Pourable, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 950.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 35 SL.
d. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -201.
e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952.
f. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7101.
g. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL.
h. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.
F. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50,
for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol IL
b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -270.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.
05/15/2012
G. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 500.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 NS.
d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto -Thane 227 High Shore Type II.
e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
f. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS.
g. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.
H. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 50, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -270.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.
05/15/2012
I. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2.
b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso -FIex 885 SG.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 NS.
d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto -Thane 227 High Shore Type II Elasto-
Thane 227 Type II.
e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
f. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS Sikaflex -
2c EZ Mix.
g. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.
h. Insert manufacturer's name; product.
J. Immersible, Single- Component, Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.
b. Sika Corporation Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - la.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.
K. Immersible, Single- Component, Pourable, Traffic - Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - ICSL.
b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.
L. Immersible Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2.
b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso -Flex 885 SG.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 NS.
d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.
M. Immersible Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic- Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso -Flex 880 GB.
b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 SL.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 245.
2.4 POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANTS
05/15/2012
A. Single- Component, Nonsag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elastoseal 230 Type I.
b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck -O -Seal One Step.
B. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant.
b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto -Seal 227 Type II.
c. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC -2 +.
d. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck -O -Seal Gun Grade.
C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 92Q, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant.
b. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC -2 +.
D. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic- Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elastoseal 227 Type I.
b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck -O -Seal 125.
E. Immersible, Multicomponent Nonsag, Traffic- Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T and Use L
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC -2 +.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
05/15/2012
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 600.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600.
d. Pecora Corporation; AC -20+.
e. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.6 SOLVENT - RELEASE - CURING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic -Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; Acryl -R Acrylic Sealant.
b. Tremco Incorporated; Mono 555.
B. Butyl - Rubber -Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 300.
b. Pecora Corporation; BC -158.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Butyl Sealant.
2.7 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured low -
modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral - curing
silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Coming Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraSpan US 1100.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Silbridge 300.
d. Pecora Corporation; Sil -Span.
e. Sealex, Inc.; ImmerSeal.
B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open -cell
foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb /cu. ft. (160
kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water - repellent agent. Factory produce in
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 9
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No_ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a
pressure - sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard.
b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.
c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.
d. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite.
e. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150.
2.8 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
05/15/2012
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
B. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
05/15/2012
3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 11
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone- Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone - sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a
bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6
mm) inside masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet
extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform
contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical
joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion
with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends,
turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound -rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 12
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field- Adhesion Testing: Field test joint - sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
3.5 CLEANING
05/15/2012
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 13
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
05/15/2012
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. 133419 — "Metal Building Systems " - Hollow metal doors and frames shall be a part of the Metal
Building System package.
1. 133419 — "Metal building systems"
2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
3. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow
metal doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory- applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches
(75 by 125 mm).
E. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to
jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) high wood
blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) space between each stacked door to permit air
circulation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No,ICU-0068(FG- 88880003)
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Benchmark; a division of Therma -Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Firedoor Corporation.
7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Habersham Metal Products Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 (ZF 120) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M or
ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153 /A 153M.
05/15/2012
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
F. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching
hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according
to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of
fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12- lb /cu. ft. (96- to 192 - kg/cu. m) density;
with maximum flame- spread and smoke - development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4-
mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral - board, or vertical steel - stiffener core.
a. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: At exterior doors, provide doors fabricated with
thermal- resistance value (R- value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft.Btu (0.704 K
x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
3. Vertical Edges for Single- Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch- (1.0 -mm -) thick, end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets and doors fabricated from A60 Galvannealed steel door for corrosive
applications. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI /SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets and doors fabricated from A60 Galvannealed steel door for corrosive
applications. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI /SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from
same material as door face sheets.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot - rolled steel
sheet.
2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from galvanealed steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from galvanealed steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates
from same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
2. Compression Type for Drywall Slip -on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and
as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing
not less than 2 -inch (50 -mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom frames at finish floor
surface.
2.6 _ HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining
hollow metal work.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No_1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.7 LOUVERS
05/15/2012
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or
baffles formed of 0.020 -inch- (0.5 -mm -) thick, cold- rolled steel sheet set into 0.032 -inch- (0.8 -mm -)
thick steel frame.
1. Lightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with baffles to prevent light from passing
from one side to the other, any angle.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4- inch -thick by 1 -inch- (6.4 -mm -thick by 25.4 -mm -) wide steel.
C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal
to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify
work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture
to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as
frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds
per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather - stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
05/15/2012
a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -
rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware;
include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware
Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface - mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware,
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26
Sections.
G. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free primer
complying with ANSUSDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field - applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built -in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 113 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
13. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations,
field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing
antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by
grout forces.
5. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 8
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
6. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural
supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural
support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting
construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.
7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1 6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non - Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 nun) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch (19 mm).
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective
work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust - inhibitive primer.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulated service doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the
wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to SEIJASCE 7.
B. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of
operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is
complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned
to the closed position.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
following:
1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles
for slats, and finishes.
2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed
in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and
textures available for units with factory - applied finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Delegated - Design Submittal: For overhead coiling doors indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
05/15/2012
Doors to be manufactured by the Cookson Company. Heavy Duty service door includes 50,000
life cycle springs, structural angle guides and bottom bar, cast iron gears and stops, fabricated
steel brackets,20 psf windload. Insulated doors have heavy duty vinyl extrusions snap onto
guides, hood has a hood baffle, exclusive interlocking slats, solid insulation is inserted between
steel slats and bottom of door is sealed by a flexible solid foam astragal. gauge selection: #45
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
slat 22ga front and back steel for doors up to 24'0" wide.
2.2 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring- loaded dead bolt, operating
handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building
keying system.
2. Keys: Provide three for each cylinder.
2.3 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES
05/15/2012
A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather - stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter
of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated.
1. At door head, use 1/8 -inch thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.
2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8 -inch thick seals of
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.
2.4 OPERATION
A. Chain operated doors shall open and close with a maximum of 30 pounds of effort utilizing an
endless chain and cast iron reduction gears.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 3
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0058(FG- 88880003)
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.4 ADJUSTING
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
END OF SECTION 08 33 23
05/15/2012
A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified.
B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each
door.
C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in
compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions,
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm - connected fire- release system.
Reset door - closing mechanism after successful test.
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion.
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 085123 - STEEL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel windows from hot - rolled sections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 088853 "Security Glazing" for glazing requirements for steel windows.
2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for on -site
painting of factory prime - coated windows.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide steel windows capable of withstanding the effects of' the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing
windows that are representative of those specified according to ASTM E 330.
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7 and IBC.
2. Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges
to less than 1/175 of glass -edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design
pressures.
B. Windborne -Debris Resistance: Provide glazed steel windows capable of resisting impact from
windborne debris, based on the pass /fail criteria as determined from testing glazed steel
windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in
ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Condensation - Resistance: Provide steel windows with a CRF when tested according to
AAMA 1503 of 36 minimum.
D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide steel windows with the maximum whole- fenestration product
U- factor indicated, when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1. U- Factor: 0.49 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F.
STEEL WINDOWS
085123 - 1
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide steel windows with a maximum whole -
fenestration product SHGC of 0.40, determined according to NFRC 200.
F. Crack Tolerances: Test each type and size of required window unit, with ventilators closed and
locked, for compliance with the following tolerances:
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:
1. Mullion details including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather - stripping details.
6. Glazing details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of steel window indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification: For steel windows and components required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1. Main Framing Member: 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long, full -sized sections, with glazing bead
weather stripping and factory - applied color finish.
2. Hardware: Full -size units with factory - applied finish.
D. Product Schedule: For steel windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
05/15/2012
E. Delegated - Design Submittal: For steel windows indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for steel windows.
C. Field quality - control reports.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranty.
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG - 88880003)
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating steel windows that meet or
exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion
in lists, and by labels, test reports, and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to window manufacturer for installation of units
required for this Project.
1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility including preparation of data for steel windows,
including Shop Drawings and Designated Design Submittal based on testing and
engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those
indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain steel windows from single source from single manufacturer.
1. Neutral- Pressure Test: NFPA 257.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review and discuss finishing of steel windows that is required to be coordinated with
finishing of other steel work for color and finish matching.
3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of steel windows with other exterior
wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing,
weeping, air barriers, sealants, and protection of finishes.
4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of steel window openings by field
measurements before fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of steel windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection.
05/15/2012
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 3
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0058(FG- 88880003)
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
c. Water leakage or air infiltration.
d. Faulty operation of operable sash and hardware.
e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hot - Rolled Steel Windows:
2.2 MATERIALS
a. A & S Window Associates, Inc.
b. Bliss Nor -Am Doors & Windows Ltd.
c. Clement Steel Windows Ltd.
d. Crittall Windows Ltd.
e. Hope's Windows, Inc.
f. Optimum Window Manufacturing Corp.
g. Torrance Steel Window Co., Inc.
05/15/2012
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one -half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of bronze, brass, stainless steel, or other metal that are warranted
by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with trim, hardware, anchors, and other
components of steel windows.
1. Exposed Fasteners: If exposed fasteners are used, provide Phillips flat -head machined
screws that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Provide units of stainless steel, hot -dip zinc - coated
steel, bronze, brass, or iron complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide units with
sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Compression -Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when
steel window is closed.
1. Weather - Stripping Material: Elastomeric, cellular, preformed gaskets complying with
ASTM C 509.
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
2. Weather - Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Weather - Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Sliding -Type Weather Stripping: Provide manufacturer's standard woven -pile weather stripping
of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin- impregnated backing fabric.
1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid,
polypropylene sheet or polypropylene- coated material.
F. Trim Members, Screen Frames, Retainers for Weather Stripping, Flashing, and Similar Items:
Stainless steel.
G. Glazing Stops: Stainless steel.
H. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide manufacturer's standard,
permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint size and movement.
2.3 WINDOW
A. Window Type: Fixed.
B. Hot- Rolled Steel Window Members: Provide frame and ventilator members formed from hot -
rolled, new billet steel sections. For combined weight of frame and ventilator members and
front -to -back depth of frame or ventilator members, comply with the following requirements:
1. Light Intermediate Windows: Not less than 2.0 lb /ft. (2.98 kg/m) in combined weight
and not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) deep.
2. Standard Intermediate Windows: Not less than 3.0 lb /ft. (4.46 kg /m) in combined weight
and not less than 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) deep.
3. Heavy Intermediate Windows: Not less than 3.5 lb /ft. (5.21 kg /m) in combined weight
and not less than 1 -5/16 inches (33.34 mm) deep.
4. Heavy Custom Windows: Not less than 4.2 lb /ft. (6.25 kg/m) in combined weight and
not less than 1 -1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep.
a. Dimensions of Projected Frame and Ventilator Members: Nominally 1/8 inch (3
mm) thick by 1 -3/8 inches (35 mm) deep except members nominally 1 -1/4 inches
(32 mm) deep may be used provided corners are welded and ground.
b. Applied Weather Stripping: 0.074 -inch (1.9 -mm) minimum thickness.
5. Window Finish: Baked enamel.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Commercial and Industrial Windows: Not less than 2.75 lb /ft. (4.09 kg /m) in combined
weight, and not less than 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) deep.
7. Window Finish: Baked enamel.
a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 5
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass: Uncoated insulating glass unit ,Fire - protection - rated, labeled, and listed glazing product
complying with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory- glazing system that produces weathertight
seal.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel windows of type and in sizes indicated to comply with SW1 standards.
Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
B. Mullions: Formed . of hot - rolled steel matching window units; with anchors for support to
structure and for installation of window units and having sufficient strength to withstand design
pressure indicated. Provide mullions of profile indicated and with cover plates. Allow for
erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections.
C. Provide weep holes and internal water passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior.
D. Glazing Stops: Provide screw - applied glazing stops; coordinate with Section 088000 "Glazing"
and with glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match panel frames. Finish glazing
stops to match window units if fabricated of steel; otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard
finish.
E. Glazing Clips: Where face glazing (without glazing stops) is indicated, furnish glazing clips for
concealment in glazing compound.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
05115/2012
A. High - Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 50
percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction
debris.
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 6
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, operators,
accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows Ievel, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impediment to thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight
construction.
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water - penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Separate corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact
with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12 "Dissimilar Materials."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air - penetration resistance and water
resistance will be performed according to AAMA 502, Test Method A, by applying same
test pressures required for performance.
2. Testing Extent: Three windows as selected by Architect and a qualified independent
testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested immediately after installation.
C. Window will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports according to AAMA 502. Testing agency will interpret test
results and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from
requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Clean factory- finished steel surfaces immediately after installing windows. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes.
B. Clean glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean
surfaces.
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 7
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. Remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
E. Refinish or replace windows with damaged finish.
END OF SECTION 085123
STEEL WINDOWS 085123 - 8
A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are
required for doors, except special types of unique and non - matching hardware specified in the same
section as the door and door frame.
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
B. Types of finish hardware required will include the following:
1. Hinges
2. Lock cylinders and keys
3. Lock and latch sets
4. Closers
5. Protection plates
6. Weatherstripping for exterior doors.
7. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.
8. Thresholds
9. Security products
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, who employs an experienced
architectural hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the
work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor.
C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard
No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and
listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door
and door frame labels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each item of hardware in
accordance with Division -1. section "Submittals ".
B. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and
include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish.
C. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory- prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other
work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG - 88880003)
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and
included basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of hardware, is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier
from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate
hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical
sets may be packed in same container.
C. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations for
installation.
D. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling
and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the
work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Responsibilities of Finish Hardware Supplier:
B. Submittals: Provide through Contractor required Product Data, Final Hardware Schedule, Separate
Keying Scheduled (if required), and samples as specified in Part 1 - General of this section, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Supplier shall verify that all hardware is in compliance with the latest edition of ANSI 117.1
D. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor at earliest possible date of estimated times and dates to
process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and d to perform other work associated
with furnishing Finish Hardware for purposes of
including in construction progress schedule and then comply with this schedule.
E. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work
in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver
hardware to proper locations.
F. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory hardware.
05/15/2012
G. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents: furnish proper types,
finishes, and quantities of finish hardware, including fasteners, and Owner's maintenance tools; and
furnish or replace any items of finish hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items, at no
cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials.
H. Responsibilities of Contractor:
I. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for Finish Hardware in same manner as submittals
for other work.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -2
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
J. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with Finish Hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates
for submittals and delivery of templates and finish hardware.
K. Coordination: Coordinate finish hardware with other work. Furnish hardware supplier or
manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness
and suitability of hardware with supplier.
L. Product Handling: Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware
jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials.
Any hardware items lost, damaged or stolen after being accepted by Contractor shall be replaced at
Contractor's expense.
PART 3- EXECUTiON
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with goveming regulations, and except as may be otherwise
directed by Architect.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces
which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and
reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division -9
sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory- prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl- rubber sealant.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace what cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended
for the application made.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment: Make final check and adjustment of all hardware items. Clean operating items
as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control
devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR #105
1 PR DRS 8'0 "X8'0 "X 1-3/4" X HMD X HMF
PEMKO
LAWRENCE 1 EA
LAWRENCE 2 EA
ROCKWOOD 2 EA
ROCKWOOD 2 EA
ROCKWOOD 2 EA
PEMKO
PEMKO
PEMKO
PEMKO
1 EA CONT HINGE
MORTISE LOCK
DOOR CLOSERS
SURFACE BOLTS
KICK PLATES
STOPS
1 EA THRESHOLD
1 EA SET W/S
1 EA ASTRAGAL
2 EA SWEEPS
DOORS # 100, 102, 103, 104
1 SGL DR 3' 0" X 7' 0" X 1-3/4" X HMD X HMF
PEMKO
LAWRENCE
LAWRENCE
ROCKWOOD
ROCKWOOD
PEMKO
PEMKO
PEMKO
DOOR #101
BEST
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
1 EA CONT HINGE
MORTISE LOCK
DOOR CLOSERS
KICK PLATES
STOPS
1 EA THRESHOLD
1 EA SET W/S
1 EA SWEEP
CFM83HD X TEK
LH8717 -L811 X 630
8016XALXSNB
580 -12" X 630
8 "X34 "X630X.050
466 X US2C
171A X 84"
303AV X 8484"
357SP X 84"
315CNX36"
CFM83HD X TEK
LH8717 -L811 X 630
8016 X AL X SNB
8" X 34" X 630 X .050
466 X US2C
171A X 36"
303AV X 3684"
315CN X 36"
1 EA RIM/ MORTISE CYL AS REQUIRED 1E72 / 1E74 X 626
05/15/2012
087100 -4
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between liter of an insulating -glass unit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
05/15/2012
B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to
ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the
following design criteria:
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project
according to ASCE /SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings.
GLAZING 088000 - 1
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
b. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph (44 m/s).
3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass
to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short- duration load.
4. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design
glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:
a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass
type factors for short- duration load.
b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design
snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short- duration load.
c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the
design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long - duration load.
5. Glass Type Factors for Wired, Patterned, and Sandblasted Glass:
a. Short - Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.5.
05/15/2012
6. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1
inch (25 mm), whichever is less.
7. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION 1 BSTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass - framing member for adhesion to and compatibility
with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint - preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
GLAZING 088000 - 2
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square.
1. Wired glass.
2. Laminated glass with colored interlayer.
3. Insulating glass.
05/15/2012
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, in 12 -inch (300 -mm) lengths. Install sealant Samples
between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Delegated - Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For installers.
B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for insulating glass glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36 -month period.
D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating -Glass Units with Sputter - Coated, Low -E Coatings:
A qualified insulating -glass manufacturer who is approved by coated -glass manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
GLAZING 088000 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain laminated glass and insulating glass from single source
from single manufacturer for each glass type.
F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's
"Glazing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG -1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR -A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's
name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
I. Fire - Protection -Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire- protection -rated glazing with
certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose - stream test, whether or not glazing has a
temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire- resistance rating in minutes.
J. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
GLAZING 088000 - 4
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
1.11 WARRANTY
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
05/15/2012
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special. Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
laminated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed
from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding
those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
insulating -glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
GLAZING 088000 - 5
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated
throughout Project.
13. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat - treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat - treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where heat - strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat -
treated float glass or Kind FT heat - treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated,
provide Kind FT heat - treated float glass.
C. Windborne- Debris - Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes enhanced - protection
testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for appropriate zone when tested according to
ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated
for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the
Project.
1. Large- Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.
05/15/2012
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. 'For laminated -glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
2. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
3. U- Factors: Center -of- glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program; expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W /sq. m x K).
4. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of- glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
5. Visible Reflectance: Center -of- glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Polished Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 1, Quality -Q6, complying
with ANSI Z97.1, Class C.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2. Mesh: MI (diamond).
2.3 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven
GLAZING 088000 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05 /15 /2012
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to
comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
C. Windbome- Debris- Impact - Resistant Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with
testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, with " Windbore- Debris- Impact
Resistance" Paragraph in "Glass Products, General" Article, and with other requirements
specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose
physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer
manufacturer's written recommendations:
a. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer.
b. Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film.
c. Ionoplast interlayer.
d. Cast -in -place and cured - transparent -resin interlayer.
e. Cast -in -place and cured - transparent -resin interlayer reinforced with polyethylene
terephthalate film.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to
comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
D. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by
designations in "Laminated -Glass Types" Article.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory- assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction Stainless steel.
3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated
Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating -Glass Types" Article and in
"Insulating- Laminated -Glass Types" Article.
GLAZING 088000 - 7
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
05/15/2012
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral - skinned neoprene gaskets
complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure - glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
C. Lock -Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock - strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with . the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale
Environmental Chambers."
5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral - curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100 /50, Use NT.
I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GLAZING 088000 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. May National Associates Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290.
d. Pecora Corporation; 890.
e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil -C990.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
05 /15/2012
A. Back- Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl - based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
GLAZING 088000 - 9
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire- Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire- resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.
2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean -cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt - glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
GLAZING 088000 - 10
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge - shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge - shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
GLAZING 088000 - 11
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive -in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure- Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
GLAZING 088000 - 12
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
18 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, .contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING 088000 - 13
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 099100 — PAINTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
05/15/2012
A. Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout
project, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop - priming and
surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
B. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, enamels,
stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish
coats.
C. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not
to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designed in "schedules ". Where
items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or
areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes
available.
D. Following categories of work are not included as part of field - applied finish work.
1. Pre - Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when
factory - finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal
toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork
and casework, and finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures,
switchgear and distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as
walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces,
furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts.
3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,
stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require
finish painting.
4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical
and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and
fan shafts will not require finish painting.
E. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under
sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work, and similar items.
1. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural
woodwork, wood casework and . shop - fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical
equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.
F. Do not paint over any code- required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual,
• or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
PAINTING 099100 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same
manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only
within recommended limits
B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to
be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request
from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of fmish materials provided for use, to
ensure compatible prime coats are used.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and
application instructions for each material proposed for use.
B. Samples: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.
Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and
application for each coat of each finish sample.
1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with texture to
simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Architect until acceptable
sheen, color, and texture is achieved.
2. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural and stained wood finish.
Label and identify each as to location and application.
3. On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, duplicate
painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full -coat fmish samples on at least 100 sq. ft.
of surface, as direct, until required sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished
lighting conditions for review of in -place work.
a. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.
L4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label, and following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage
of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
PAINTING 099100 - 2
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Protect from freezing. where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily
rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are
adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing
and application of paints.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
05/15/2012
A. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F, unless otherwise permitted by paint
manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 deg F and 95 deg F, unless otherwise permitted by paint
manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 %; or to damp
or web surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUC°1'S
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. The Sherwin - Williams Company (S -W). - Basis of Design
2. Devoe and Reynolds Co. (Devoe).
3. Glidden Coatings and Resins, Division of SCM Corporation.(Glidden).
4. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh).
6. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured
by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification
as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable.
B. Color Pigments: Pure, non - fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.
PART 3- BXECUTION
PAINTING 099100 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG- 88880003)
3.1 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and
notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to Applicator.
B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within any particular area.
C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental
to formation of a durable paint film.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
05/15/2012
A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify
Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with
substrates primed by others.
2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and
similar items in place and not to be finish- painted, or provide surface - applied protection prior
to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of
items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall
removed items.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and
grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from
cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly - painted surfaces.
B. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cernentitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster
and cement - asbestos board to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils,
and by roughening as required to remove glaze.
1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and
burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over
surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop- coated, of oil, grease,
dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
1. Touch -up shop - applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other
sections of these specifications. Clean and touch -up with same type shop primer.
D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non - petroleum based solvent.
PAINTING 099100 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION
05/15/2012
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
B. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material
before using.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of
paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to
insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive
a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before
final installation of equipment.
4. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
5. Paint (all coats) behind downspouts at exterior walls before downspouts are installed.
6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges sarne as exterior faces, unless otherwise
indicated.
7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
8. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and touch -up
painted, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first -coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as
recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which
has not been prime coated by others.
PAINTING 099100 - 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas
in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn - through or other defects due to insufficient
sealing.
E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform
finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or
repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.5 CLEAN -UP AND PROTECTION
05/15/2012
A. Clean -Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and
rags at end of each work day.
1. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint- spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch
otherwise damage finished surfaces.
B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting
and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
acceptable to Architect.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly- painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of
painting operations.
2. At completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Ferrous Metal:
1. Full Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer.
a. Prime Coat: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer (B50Z series).
b. Moore: Ironclad Retard() Rust Inhibitive Paint.
c. First and Second Finish Coats: Industrial Enamel HS (B54HS series).
d. *Note: Primer not required on items delivered shop primed.
B. Zinc- Coated Metal:
1. High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer.
a. Prime Coat: Galvite HS (B50WZ30).
b. First and Second Finish Coats: Industrial Enamel HS (B54HS series).
PAINTING 099100 - 6
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
1. Concrete Masonry Units:
2. Interior: Epoxy system (solvent base) gloss finish
a. 1st coat: heavy duty block filler, B42W46 (18 mils wet, 10 mils wet)
b. 2nd coat: tile -clad HS Epoxy, B62WZ100 series
c. 3rd coat: tile -clad HS Epoxy, B62WZ100 series (2.5 -4 mils dry per coat)
05/15/2012
3. Ferrous Metal & Zinc - Coated Metal:
Semi -Gloss Enamel Finish:
a. *Prime Coat: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (B66W1).
b. First and Second Finish Coats: ProMar 200 AIkyd Semi -Gloss (B34W200 series).
c. *Note: Prime coat not required on items delivered shop primed.
END OF SECTION 099100
PAINTING 099100 - 7
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 101416 - PLAQUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions andDivision 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plaques.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For plaques.
05/15 /2012
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show plaque mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,
and layout for each plaque at least half size.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of plaque, exposed component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of plaque showing all components and with the
required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Plaques: Half -size Sample.
2. Exposed Accessories: Half -size Sample of each accessory type.
E. Plaque Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a plaque or
sign schedule.
PLAQUES 101416 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For plaques to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products and an entity that employs installers and
supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of plaques that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial. Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLAQUES, GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: Plaques shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2.2 PLAQUES
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
Cast Plaque: Plaque with background texture, border, and characters having uniform faces,
sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Plaque Material: Cast bronze.
2. Plaque Thickness: 0.25 inch (6.35 mm).
3. Finishes:
a. Integral Metal Finish: Antique oxidized.
05/15 /2012
4. Background Texture: Pebble or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PLAQUES 101416 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
5. Integrally Cast Border Style: Square double line, polished
6. Mounting: Concealed studs
7. Text and Typeface: Times Roman or typeface as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range
2.3 MATERIALS
05/15/2012
A. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, alloy recommended by manufacturer and finisher for finish
indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of plaques,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless -steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Plaque Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of
plaque, screwed into back of plaque, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally
into back of plaque, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching plaque finish, with type of
head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
B. Adhesives: As recommended by plaque manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less
for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on -site when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Adhesives: As recommended by plaque manufacturer and that comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale
Environmental Chambers."
D. Two -Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high -bond, foam -core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm)
thick, with adhesive on both sides.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold - applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard plaques according to requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble plaques in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble plaques only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.
PLAQUES 101416 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Purnp Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
2, Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist
water penetration and retention.
3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds
and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean
exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to
existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where
possible; use exposed fasteners that match plaque finish.
6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and
other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff
castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before
finishing.
B. Surface - Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel
surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.
1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard baked enamel.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long
dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.
D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication
but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 CLEAR ORGANIC COATING FOR COPPER -ALLOY FINISHES
A. Clear Organic Coating: Clear, waterborne, air - drying, acrylic lacquer called "Incralac";
specially developed for coating copper -alloy products; consisting of a solution of methyl
methacrylate copolymer with benzotriazole to prevent breakdown of the film in UV light; shop
applied in two uniform coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying
between coats and without runs or other surface imperfections, to a total dry film thickness of 1
mil (0.025 mm).
PLAQUES 101416 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of plaque
work.
B. Verify that plaque - support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate plaques without gaps
or irregularities between backs of plaques and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
05/15 /2012
A. General: Install plaques using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Install plaques Ievel, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with
plaque surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install plaques so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that plaque surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris
that would impair installation.
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
13. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of
plaque. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place plaque in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support plaque in position until adhesive
fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place plaque in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in plaque as template.
Countersink holes in plaque if required. Place plaque in position and flush to surface.
Install through fasteners and tighten.
3. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install bracket supports in
position so that plaque is correctly located and aligned.
4. Adhesive: Clean bond- breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of plaque and of
suitable quantity to support weight of plaque after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive
away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as plaque is applied and to prevent
PLAQUES 101416 - 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
visibility of cured adhesive at plaque edges. Place plaque in position, and push to engage
adhesive. Temporarily support plaque in position until adhesive fully sets.
5. Two -Face Tape: Clean bond - breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of plaque and of suitable quantity to
support weight of plaque without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent
visibility at plaque edges. Place plaque in position, and push to engage tape adhesive..
6. Shim -Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates
with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other direct
mounting methods are impractical. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for
secure attachment to substrate. Attach plaques to plate using method specified above.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed plaques and plaques that do not comply with
specified requirements. Replace plaques with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components
that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as plaques are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of plaques according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain plaques in a
clean condition during construction and protect from damage until' acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101416
05/15/2012
PLAQUES 101416 - 6
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire
extinguisher and mounting brackets.
• B Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire
protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
• 1. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to,
the following:
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.7 COORDINATION
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
05/15/2012
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.8 WARRANTY
1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND- CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following]:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
i. Moon - American.
j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.
k. Potter Roemer LLC.
1. Pyro -Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
B. Multipurpose Dry - Chemical Type in Brass Container : UL -rated 2- A:10 -B:C, 5 -lb (2.3 -kg)
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in chrome - plated brass
container.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or red baked - enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
h. Potter Roemer LLC.
05/15/2012
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket - mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation; Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper . charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: {54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire
extinguisher.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 133423 - ALUMINUM CANOPIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division -I Specification Sections, shall apply to work specified in this
Section.
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK
05/15/2012
A. Work in this section shall include design, fabrication and installation of complete welded,
extruded aluminum protective cover system. All work shall be in complete accordance with
the drawings and this specification.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Design Manual 2000, Specifications & Guidelines for Aluminum Structures.
B. ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Concrete Work Section 033000
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information, specifications and installation
instructions for building components and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings including all necessary plan dimensions,
elevations and details. General Contractor shall verify all dimensions and provide elevations
at each column, finish floor, and related soffit before releasing to manufacturer for
fabrication.
C. Certification: Submit design calculations signed by a Registered Professional Engineer,
licensed in the project state. Design calculations shall state that the protective cover system
design complies with the wind requirements of ASCE 7, the stability criteria of
applicable building code, and all other governing criteria.
ALUMINUM CANOPIES 133423 -1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Protective Cover shall be wholly produced by a recognized manufacturer with at least five
years experience in the design and fabrication of extruded aluminum walkway cover systems.
Components shall be assembled in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Protective cover shall be installed by manufacturer. Third party installation is not acceptable.
Protective cover system, including material and workmanship, shall be warranted from defects
for a period of one year from substantial completion of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contract documents are based on products manufactured by:
Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc.,
1477 Rosedale Drive, Hiram, GA 30141
770/439 -2120, fax 770/439 -2122
800/341 -3325,
ppc cr,peachtreecovers.com , www.peachtreecovers.com
E.L. Bums Company, Shreveport, LA
Dittmer Architectural Aluminum, Winter Springs, FL
B. Other manufacturers will be considered for substitution only when the following conditions
are met:
• Other manufacturers must qualify to bid not less than 10 days prior to bid closing
date.
2.2 DESIGN
A. Protective cover shall be all welded extruded aluminum system complete with internal
drainage. Non- welded systems are not acceptable.
B. Roll formed deck is not acceptable. Expansion joints shall be included to accommodate
temperature changes of 120oF. Expansion joints shall have no metal to metal contact.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: All sections shall be extruded aluminum 6063 alloy, heat treated to T-
6 temper.
B. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be aluminum, 18 -8 stainless steel or 300 series stainless steel.
ALUMINUM CANOPIES 133423 -2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Protective Coating: Aluminum columns embedded in concrete shall be protected by clear
acrylic.
D. Grout: Grout shall be 2000 p.s.i. compressive strength, 1 part Portland cement and 3 parts
masonry sand. Add water to produce pouring consistency.
E. Gaskets: Gaskets shall be dry seal santoprene pressure type.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Columns: Columns shall be radius - cornered tubular extrusion of size required to meet design
criteria with cutout and internal diverter for drainage where indicated. Circular downspout
opening in column not acceptable.
B. Beams: Beams shall be open -top tubular extrusion of size and shape required to meet design
criteria, top edges thickened for strength and designed to receive deck members in self - flashing
manner. Structural ties shall be installed in tops of all beams.
C. Deck: Deck shall be extruded self - flashing sections interlocking into a composite unit.
Closures at deck ends shall be welded plates.
D. Fascia: Fascia shall be manufacturer's standard shape. Size as indicated on drawings.
E. Flashing: Flashing shall be .040 aluminum (min) All thru -wall flashing by others.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Bent Construction: Beams and columns shall be factory welded with neatly mitered comers into
one -piece rigid bents. All welds shall be smooth and uniform using an inert gas shielded arc.
Suitable edge preparation shall be performed to assure 100% penetration. Grind welds only
where interfering with adjoining structure to allow for flush connection. Field welding is not
permitted. Rigid mechanical joints shall be used when shipping limitations prohibit the
shipment of fully welded bents.
Deck Construction: Deck shall be manufactured of extruded modules that interlock in a self -
flashing manner. Interlocking joints shall be positively fastened at 8" O.C. creating a monolithic
structural unit capable of developing the full strength of the sections. The fastenings must have
minimum shear strength of 350 pounds each. Deck shall be assembled with sufficient camber to
offset dead load deflection.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Factory baked enamel finish, AAMA 2603, standard white.
05/15/2012
ALUMINUM CANOPIES 133423 -3
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
05/15/2012
A. Erection shall be performed after all concrete, and roofing work in the vicinity is complete
and cleaned.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Column Sleeves: Column sleeves (styrofoam blockouts) or anchor bolts (if required) shall
be furnished by Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc. and installed by the General Contractor.
B. Erection: Protective cover shall be erected true to line, level and plumb. Aluminum columns
embedded in concrete shall be protected by clear acrylic. Downspout columns shall be filled
with grout to the discharge level to prevent standing water. Non - draining columns shall have
weep holes installed at top of concrete to remove condensation.
3.3 CLEANING
A. All protective cover components shall be cleaned promptly after installation.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Extreme care shall be taken to protect materials during and after installation.
END OF SECTION 133423
ALUMINUM CANOPIES 133423 -4
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 149200 - TOP RUNNING SINGLE BRIDGE CRANE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, shall apply to work specified in this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Overhead crane shall consist of one top running single, fabricated box girder bridge with one flange
mounted, under - running trolley/hoist.
B. Capacity of crane shall be 2 US tons. Span shall be as shown on the drawings. Service class shall be
CMAA Class C or D. Lift speed shall be 16' to 20' per minute.
C. Design Specifications:
1. Crane shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the latest version of CMAA
#70 and OSHA specifications.
2. It shall be engineered with standard components and shall be serviced from an inventory of
parts stocked at original equipment manufacturer (OEM) distributors.
D. Runway Location and Power Supply:
1. Crane shall be suitable for indoor service with an ambient of 40 to 125 degree F.
2. It shall be arranged for operation on a 460/3/60 power supply, +1 -10 % voltage.
1.3 OPERATOR'S CONTROL
A. Pushbutton Pendant:
1. The pushbutton station shall be suspended from a C -track type messenger system with
flexible cables festooned from wheeled trolleys.
2. The messenger system shall be mounted to the girder and shall travel independent of the
trolley/ hoist.
B. Operator Functions:
1. Main hoist: 2 speed buttons
2. Trolley: 2 speed buttons
3. Bridge: 2 speed buttons
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -1
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
4. Mainline power: Start/Stop
1.4 MAIN HOIST
A. Hoist:
1. The hoist shall be a "packaged" standard configuration with integral trolley.
2. The hoist shall be single sheaved with multiple part ropes.
B. Bottom Block:
C. Upper Block:
I. Brake:
05/15/2012
1. The sheaves shall be forged or hot rolled steel and supported by roller bearings.
2. The hook shall be supported on a fixed crosshead.
3. The hook shall be made of forged steel, rotates on a roller thrust bearing, and have a safety
latch.
4. The hook shall be single pronged (fish) type.
1. The upper block sheaves shall be the same as in the bottom block. The frame shall be
fabricated from steel plate. The upper block shall be integral to the trolley frame. Sheaves
must be serviceable without complete disassembly of the trolley frame(s).
D. Wire Rope: Wire rope shall be 6 x 37 classification with U.S. or Metric dimensions. Rated capacity
load plus the weight of the bottom block divided by the number of parts of rope shall not exceed 20%
of the rope's published breaking strength.
E. Drum: The hoist drum shall be grooved to accept hoist rope in a single layer when the hook is in the
highest position, and not less than two wraps shall remain on the drum when the hook is in the lowest
position for the specified lift. Drum shall be half -depth grooved so that 1/2 the diameter of the cable
is fully seated in the drum groove offering less cable wear. Smaller grooving with rope guides shall
not be used. The drum diameter to rope diameter ratio shall be a minimum of 12:1.
F. Drum Tail Bearing: Steel fixture shall be welded or bolted to the trolley frame at assembly. The
pedestal shall accept a standard roller bearing.
G. Speed Reducer: The speed reducer shall be a shaft coupled type with alloy steel heat treated helical
and spur gears with of AGMA Class 11 or better. Gears shall run in oil in a completely enclosed cast
iron or fabricated steel gearbox. All gears shall be supported on spherical roller bearings.
H. Motor: Motor shall be a totally enclosed, fan - cooled, squirrel -cage induction motor with anti - friction
bearings, and Class "H" insulation. Motor shall be rated 30 minutes, 85 °C temperature rise, by
resistance, above 40 °C ambient temperature, based on HMI/ CMAA standards. Motor shall have
temperature detectors embedded in the windings. Motor shall be connected to the speed reducer with
a replaceable coupling. Motor shall be located inside of drum. Flange mounted motors are
acceptable. In no case shall motor synchronous speed exceed 3600 -RPM.
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Hoist motor shall be equipped with a spring -set electric release brake.
2. Brake shall be rated at 150% minimum of rated motor torque and shall be DC operated.
Conical brakes shall not be used.
1.5 TROLLEY
05/15/2012
A. The trolley shall consist of a frame supported by a minimum of four (4) wheels and the traverse drive.
The trolley shall support the hoist on a fabricated steel frame. Use of the hoist gearcase as part of the
trolley frame is not allowed.
B. Frame: Frame shall be a fabricated steel structure.
C. Wheels: Wheel assemblies shall be single flange, gear driven type. Wheels shall be press fit onto
heat - treated stub axles. Wheels shall be heat treated steel, single flanged with straight tread.
D. Bumpers: Bumpers shall be rubber or elastomer type.
E. Drive: Drive shall be A -1 type with two wheels driven.
F. Speed Reducers: Trolley drives shall be gear reducers (gearmotors) with integral motor and brake.
All gears shall be carburized and ground to AGMA 11 specifications. The gears shall be completely
enclosed in cast iron or steel housings and splash lubricated. All gears shall be supported on spherical
roller bearings. The drives shall be mounted on the drive axles with keyed connections to transmit
torque. The drives shall have resilient torque restraints.
G. Motors: Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, squirrel -cage induction motors with anti - friction
bearings, and Class "H" insulation. Motors are 30 minute rated, 85 °C temperature rise, by resistance,
above 40 °C. ambient temperature, based on NEMA standards. Motors are flange mounted to trolley
speed reducers.
H. Brakes: Trolley motors shall be equipped with a spring -set electric release, DC operated brakes.
Brakes shall have the torque capability to stop the motion within a distance in feet not to exceed 10%
of rated full speed, in feet per minute, with capacity load. Brakes shall be operated by DC power
supply. Conical brakes shall not be used.
1.6 BRIDGE
A. The bridge shall consist of a single fabricated box girder supported on wheeled end trucks, bridge
drives, and crane control. Crane to have four (4) bridge wheels.
B. Girders:
1. Bridge will be of single girder design, designed per CMAA #70, Class "D ". Girder will
be parallel flange welded box sections with diaphragms
2. The trolley rail will be incorporate into the lower girder plate.
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -3
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/1 5/2012
3. Girder shall be cambered to compensate for dead and live load deflections per CMAA
#70.
4. Girders shall be connected to the end trucks by bolted or welded connections in two planes.
C. End Trucks: End trucks shall be structural tube or welded box section type. Provisions shall be
made to prevent the end truck from dropping more than one inch in case of axle failure. Rail sweeps
shall be in front of all wheels. Jacking pads will be provided to help in wheel removal.
D. Wheels: Wheel assemblies shall be rotating axle type. Wheels shall be press fit onto heat - treated
axles, axles shall be mounted on spherical roller bearings, and bearings shall be mounted in bolted
bearing housings. Bridge wheels shall be heat - treated forged steel, double flanged with straight tread.
Bearing housings shall be bolted in, cast steel or iron flanged type that are sealed to retain grease and
exclude contaminants. Bridge wheel hardness will be 58 Rc or greater.
E. Bumpers: Bumpers shall be rubber or elastomer type.
F. Drive: Drive shall be an A-4 type with two wheels driven.
G. Speed reducers: Bridge drives shall be gear reducers (gearmotors) with integral motors and brakes.
All gears shall be carburized and ground. The gears shall be completely enclosed in cast steel or iron
housing and splash lubricated. All gears shall be supported on spherical roller bearings. The drives
shall be mounted on the drive axles with keyed connections to transmit torque. The drives shall have
resilient torque restraints mounted to a bracket off of the end trucks.
H. Motors: Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel -cage induction motors with anti - friction
bearings, and Class "1-1" insulation. Motors shall be 30 minute rated, 85 °C. temperature rise, by
resistance, above 40 °C. ambient temperature, based on NEMA standards. Motors shall be flange
mounted to bridge speed reducers.
Brakes: Bridge motors shall be equipped with spring -set electric release brakes. Brakes shall have
the torque capability to stop the motion within a distance in feet not to exceed 10% of rated full
speed, in feet per minute, with capacity load. Brakes shall be operated by DC power supply. No
conical brakes.
1.7 CONTROL & WIRING
A. Hoist control shall be two- speed, magnetic contactor crane control. Control shall provide a low and a
high speed range.
B. Traverse control shall be two- speed, magnetic contactor control. Control shall provide a low and a
high speed range.
C. Control features:
1. Electronic motor over current protection.
2. Modular construction shall have front wired panels.
3. Fused branch circuit protection.
4. 115 volt fused on both primary and secondary control transformer.
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Traverse control shall be provided with two (2) speed points.
E. Control Enclosures, Heating, Cooling and Mounting
05/15/2012
1. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 or 12.
2. Bridge controls shall be mounted on the bridge.
3. The trolley/ hoist controls shall be mounted on the trolley and shall be wired to terminals for
connection to span festoon conductors.
G. Hoist Limit Switch, Geared: The upper and lower stop control circuit shall be operated by the
primary geared upper and lower limit switch. Switch will be reversible with an automatic reset when
backing out of switch.
H. Hoist Limit Switch, Weight Operated: A secondary weight operated control circuit upper limit
switch shall be provided. Switch will be reversible with an automatic reset when backing out of
switch.
1. Span Conductors: Power to the trolley shall be provided by flat PVC cable or round S.O. or W.
rubber covered flexible cables mounted in a festoon conductor system, mounted off rear girder.
Encoder wire shall be continuous, shielded independent wire.
Festoon track shall be C -Track type. •
J. Mainline Conductors and Collectors: Mainline conductors and collectors shall be 60 -90 Amps. A
mainline collector staff with four suitable double shoe collectors shall be provided to engage mainline
conductors.
K. Crane Wiring: Crane shall be wired in accordance with the National Electrical Code. The crane
wiring shall be designed for fast and error free assembly.
1.8 FEATURES
A. Guards:
1. A guard shall be provided to prevent hoist ropes from contacting mainline conductors.
2. Rail sweeps shall be in front of all wheels to clear runway rails of any obstructions.
B. Lubrication:
1. Speed reducer gears and speed reducer bearings shall be oil splash lubricated.
2. All running sheaves shall have individual lube points for each sheave. One lube point for all
the sheaves in the sheave pin shall not be allowed.
3. Lubrication: Lubrication fittings for bridge and trolley wheel bearings, upper block bearings,
and drum bearings.
1.9 SHOP ASSEMBLY, TESTING, PAINTING & PACKING
A. Crane shall be assembled and wired in OEM shops.
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -5
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
Install drawings shall be submitted before crane shipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation: The crane should be assembled and installed by the OEM.
05/15/2012
B. The hoist, trolley and bridge electrical systems shall be shop tested by being power operated without
load to assure correct operation.
C. Crane shall be painted in accordance with OEM procedure. This shall be suitable for indoor exposure.
D. This shall consist of SSPC SP I, SP2, or SP3 cleaning; one coat of primer enamel and one coat of
finish enamel.
E. Components shall be match - marked and dismantled to the extent required for shipment. Machined
surfaces shall be suitably protected against corrosion.
F. All material shall be carefully loaded for transportation. All parts shall be suitably braced to guard
against possible damage in transit. Small pieces shall be boxed for shipment.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Drawings: General arrangement drawing shall be submitted for information upon completion of
engineering. General arrangement drawing shall show wheel loads, crane dimensions, and interface
of crane clearances to building and runway.
• B. Manuals: A Parts Manual listing and identify all wearing parts, and an Operation and Maintenance
Manual shall be provided at completion of installation.
C. Spare Parts: OEM shall offer a complete line of spare parts made specifically for OEM equipment.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Kone Cranes, Inc. and/or Morris Material Handling, Inc.
3.2 Start -up & Field Testing: After the crane is coil pletely installed with all crane electrical connections
completed and electrical power provided to the crane collector shoes, the crane shall require a
complete check out, start-up, and test procedure prior to operation. It is United States OSHA law that
all new overhead and gantry cranes be load tested prior to being put into service. Test loads will be
provided by the OEM, per OEM requirements and in compliance with U. S. OSHA. The crane test
load shall be a minimum 100% of rated capacity and shall not exceed 125% of rated capacity.
3.3. Training: Provide with the crane a video entitled "Fundamentals of Overhead Crane Safety ". The
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -6
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
video shall provide basic operation and safety tips regarding electric overhead traveling crane
operation. Include in the cost of the crane one day of classroom type operational and safety training
for crane operators and maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION 149200
TOP RUNNING SINGLE GIRDER CRANE 149200 -7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 COORDINATION
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
05/15/2012
A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general - purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15 /2012
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random- wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F .
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T .
2.4 SINGLE -PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1 /20 hp . shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
13. Multispeed Motors: Variable- torque, permanent - split- capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal- protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
05/15/2012
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
05/15/2012
A. Galvanized- Steel -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.
2.2 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107 /C 1107M, Grade B, post - hardening and volume - adjusting, dry,
hydraulic- cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve -seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1 -inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
END OF SECTION 230517
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve -seal
system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and - location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping - penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 : Galvanized - steel -pipe sleeves .
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant- volume air systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
TAB strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. Certified TAB reports.
E. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB .
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or
NEBB
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or
NEBB as a TAB technician.
B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect .
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
05/15/2012
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS
3.2 EXAMINATION
05/15/2012
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow- control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment,
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
2. Calculate system - effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality - control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures.
B. Complete system - readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
05/15/2012
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping
Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper - control positions, valve position
indicators, fan- speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units.
3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts.
C. For variable- air - volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct - airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air
dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air- handling -unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
05/15/2012
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air - handling and - treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat -
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system- effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air- handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air - handling -unit
performance.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full - cooling, full -
heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct - reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering - and leaving -air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent .
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent
3.10 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC • 230593 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.11 FINAL REPORT
05/15/2012
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet - and dry -bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable - air - volume systems.
g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
C. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single -line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
D. Air- Handling -Unit Test Reports: For air - handling units with coils, include the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total air flow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static- pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Preheat -coil static - pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Cooling -coil static - pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Heating -coil static - pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outdoor -air damper position.
1. Return -air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
E. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft..
05/15/2012
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate m cfm.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outdoor -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return -air, wet- and dry -bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
j. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e: Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
G. Air - Terminal - Device Reports:
05/15/2012
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air - handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft..
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final air flow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
H. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS
05/15/2012
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:
1. Condensate drain piping, indoors and outdoors.
2. Refrigerant suction and hot -gas piping, indoors and outdoors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Field quality - control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a. leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded - rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. K -Flex USA; Insul -Lock, Insul -Tube, and K -FLEX LS.
G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
05/15/2012
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 2
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro -Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000- Degree Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K.
Owens Coming; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ . Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type II, Class 1.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85 -75.
d. K -Flex USA; R -373 Contact Adhesive.
Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.
Company; CP -127.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.,
Company; 85- 60/85 -70.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
05/15/2012
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
, a business of H. B. Fuller
a business of H. B. Fuller
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :.
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP -82.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85 -50.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 3
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.3 MASTICS
2.5 TAPES
05/15/2012
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL- PRF- 19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor - Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below- ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30- 80/30 -90.
b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry
film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.4 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory - applied jackets on various applications. When
factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft - paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type L
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor - retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus /SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf /inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
05/15/2012
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor- barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor - barrier mastic.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
L. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows:
3.4 PENETRATIONS
a. For below - ambient services, apply vapor - barrier mastic over staples.
05/15/2012
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor - barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 6
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
05/15/2012
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: .
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 7
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above - ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward - clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory - applied jackets on below- ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
05/15/2012
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation. section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 8
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Underground piping.
2. Chrome - plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
3.10 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
END OF SECTION 230719
05/15/2012
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 9
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG - 88880003)
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air- conditioning applications.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R -410A:
1. Suction Lines for Air - Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat -Pump Applications: 535 psig.
3. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Welding certificates.
B. Field quality - control test reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are clean when installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought - Copper Unions: ASME B16.22,
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95 -5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin - bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned- bronze - wire - reinforced
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 -inch misalignment in minimum 7 -inch-
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.2 REFRIGERANTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
C. ASHRAE 34, R -410A: Pentafluoroethane /Difluoromethane.
05/15/2012
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R -410A
A. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat -Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR
, annealed- or drawn - temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B. Safety - Relief -Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR , annealed- or drawn- temper tubing
and wrought- copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Refer to Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 230993
"Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring,
and sequence of operation.
K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
05/15/2012
232300 - 3
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
O. SIope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid -valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion -valve bulb.
Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC
Piping."
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding,
to prevent scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper- phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket .fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium -free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 4
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports
for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
05/15/2012
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet Iong.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper
pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size 3/8 inch.
8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure.
3. Test high- and low - pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter -dryer core in charging line.
END OF SECTION 232300
05/15/2012
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 6
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single -wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Duct liner.
3. Sealants and gaskets.
4. Hangers and supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound - control devices, duct -
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1. Liners and adhesives.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality- control reports.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE -WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static - pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse
Joints," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams:. Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static - pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 .
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous -Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH 124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
05/15/2012
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
05/15/2012
a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3. Solvent -Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
B. Insulation Pins and Washers:
1. Cupped -Head, Capacitor- Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor - discharge welding, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1 /2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer.
2. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick
galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter.
C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7 -11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -
edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm or where indicated.
9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire- damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws,
rivets, or welds.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface - burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame- spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke- developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static - Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
C. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
05/15/2012
A. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self - tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air - handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install factory- or shop - fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposedto
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1 -1/2
inches.
I. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two -part tape sealing system.
C. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
D. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
A. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible ":
1. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
2. Unconditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
3. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class C.
4. Conditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
E. Install upper attachments to structures: Select and size upper attachments with pull -out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 PAINTING
• A Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized -steel primer.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.8 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
for HVAC."
3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Constant - Volume Air - Handling Units :
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2 -inch wg
B. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Air- Handling Units :
a. . Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg .
C. Liner:
1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type 1, 2 inches thick.
2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
D. Elbow Configuration:
05/15/2012
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -2, "Rectangular Elbows."
END OF SECTION 233113
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
L2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Turning vanes.
3. Flexible connectors.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam .marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 .
2. Exposed - Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
2. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
3. Nailor Industries Inc.
4. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
5. Pottorff.
6. Ruskin Company.
7. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1250 fpm .
D. Blade Action: Parallel.
2.4 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. EIgen Manufacturing.
4. METALAIRE, Inc.
5. SEMCO Incorporated.
6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
D. Vane Construction: Single wall.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
05/15/2012
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil- shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous -glass fill.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible "; Figures 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3. Elgen Manufacturing.
4. Ventfabrics, Inc.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
05/15/2012
B. Materials: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip (5 - 314 inches] wide attached to
two strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch - thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected .ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf /inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in. SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in
galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at outlet of exhaust fans and louvers. .
D. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat - response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and
damper.
END OF SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Propeller fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Operating Limits Classify according to AMCA 99.
B. Field quality - control reports.
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. AIso include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound -power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Roof curbs.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the
items involved:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling - mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt- driven unit.
05/15/2012
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA- Certified performance ratings and shall bear the
AMCA - Certified Ratings Seal.
C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for
restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural -steel support members.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PROPELLER FANS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carnes Company.
2. Chicago Blower Corporation.
3. Cincinnati Fan.
4. Hartzell Fan Incorporated.
5. Howden Buffalo Inc.
6. JencoFan.
7. King Company; part of Mestek, Inc.
8. Loren Cook Company.
9. Madison Manufacturing.
10. Moffitt Corporation Inc.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
11. New York Blower Company (The).
12. PermBarry.
13. Quietaire Inc.
14. Stanley Fans.
15. W.W. Grainger, Inc.: Dayton Products.
05/15/2012
B. Housing: Galvanized -steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked- enamel
finish coat applied after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed -steel blades riveted to heavy -gage steel spider bolted to cast -iron
hub.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded- aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast - aluminum hub;
factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside
of fan housing.
F. Fan Drive:
1. Resiliently mounted to housing.
2. Statically and dynamically balanced.
3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower,
with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4.
6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self - aligning ball bearings.
a. Ball- Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L of 100,000 hours .
8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use
with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range
at fan design conditions.
10. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
11. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
G. Accessories:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon
bearings.
2. Motor -Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal - overload protection mounted inside
fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.2 MOTORS
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
05/15/2012
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
A. Certify sound -power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA- Certified
Ratings Seal.
B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA - Certified
Ratings Seal.
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal- overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 4
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature - control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature - control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"
for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes split - system. air - conditioning and heat -pump units consisting of separate
evaporator -fan and compressor - condenser components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of
capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split - system air - conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set(s) for each air - handling unit.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
05/15/2012
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard
for Refrigeration Systems."
SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.7 COORDINATION
1.8 WARRANTY
05/15/2012
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000
"Cast -in -Place Concrete."
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split - system . air - conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. For Compressor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems.
2. Lennox International Inc.
3. Trane; a business of American Standard companies.
4. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Concealed Evaporator -Fan Components:
1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
2. Insulation: Faced, glass -fiber duct liner.
3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal -
expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
4. Fan: Forward - curved, double -width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
5. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS 238126 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
lubrication.
c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
6. Filters: Throwaway.
7. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from
cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends)
and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.
b. Single -wall, galvanized -steel sheet.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.
Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1 .
d. Pan -Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate
from top coil.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
05/15/2012
Air - Cooled, Compressor - Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current - sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
a. Compressor Type: Scroll.
b. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A .
c. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and
liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.
3. Heat -Pump Components: Reversing valve and low- temperature -air cutoff thermostat.
4. Fan: Aluminum - propeller type, directly connected to motor.
5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal - overload protection.
6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B. Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS 238126 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU -0068(FG - 88880003)
C. Drain Hose: For condensate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
05/15/2012
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
13. Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground- mounted, compressor- condenser components on 4 -inch- thick, reinforced
concrete base that is 4 inches larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor
installation with concrete base.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal
Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts
to split - system air - conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors
are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
13. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. _ Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS 238126 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION 238126
05/15/2012
SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS 238126 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Propeller unit heaters with electric- resistance heating coils.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
13. CWP: CoId working pressure.
C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each product indicated.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality - control test reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 1
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Airtherm; a Mestek Company.
2. Engineered Air Ltd.
3. Mc Quay International.
4. Rosemex Products.
5. Ruffneck Heaters; a division of Lexa Corporation.
6. Trane.
7. Qmark.
B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge
configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.
C. Comply with UL 2021.
D. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.
E. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory - assembled and -
tested propeller unit heater before shipping.
F. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical
units.
G. Electric - Resistance Heating Elements: Nickel - chromium heating wire, free from expansion
noise and 60 -Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or
corrosion - resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point
during normal operation.
1. Circuit Protection: One -time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for high - temperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless -steel or corrosion- resistant material.
H. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.
I. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 2
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated .
J. Control Devices:
1. Unit - mounted thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing -in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
05/15/2012
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
C. Support propeller unit heaters from wall using manufacturer provided universal mounting
bracket. .
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
END OF SECTION 238239
05/15/2012
UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260519 - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2, Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and
data circuits.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Con„ ply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Alvan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. Alpha Wire.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Encore Wire Corporation.
05/15/2012
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
6. Southwire Incorporated.
05/15/2012
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S -95 -658.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S -95 -658 for Type THW -2
Type THHN- 2- THWN -2 or Type XHHW -2 .
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 /ICEA S -95 -658 for . metal -clad cable,
Type MC with ground wire.
E VFC Cable:
1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC -ER cable.
2. Type TC -ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, dual spirally wrapped
copper tape shields and three bare symmetrically applied ground wires, and sunlight- and
oil - resistant outer PVC jacket.
3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and II, Division 2 hazardous
location applications.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Gardner Bender.
3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
4. Ideal Industries, Inc.
5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.
6. NSi Industries LLC.
7. O- Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.
9. Tyco Electronics.
B. Description: Factory- fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper . All conductors to be stranded.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. All conductors to be stranded.
05/15/2012
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN- 2- THWN -2, single conductors in raceway .
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN- 2- THWN -2, single conductors in raceway
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN -2- THWN -2,
single conductors in raceway .
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on- Grade, and Underground: Type THHN -2-
THWN-2, single conductors in raceway .
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN -2- THWN -2, single
conductors in raceway .
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN- 2- THWN -2, single
conductors in raceway .
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on- Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN -2- THWN -2, single conductors in raceway
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless -
steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
I. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC -ER cable with dual tape shield.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished wails, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C. Use manufacturer- approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire /cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
05/15/2012
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A -486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
13. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of .
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire- resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:
1. Underground distribution grounding.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
05/15/2012
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross
section, with 9/32 -inch holes spaced 1 -1/8 inches apart. Stand -off insulators for mounting shall
comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at
least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic - welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D. Bus -bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire
terminals, and long - barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar.
23 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 5/8 by 96 inches in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
2. Duct -Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as
part of duct -bank installation.
C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished
floor unless otherwise indicated.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
05/15/2012
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as . otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -
mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat - Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat - tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Normally non - current carrying metal parts of equipment and/or enclosures: Connect metal parts
of Motor Frames, Enclosures for Motor Controllers, and Motor- Operated Water Pumps to an
equipment grounding conductor.
E. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by
NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-
STD- 607 -A.
1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide
No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding
electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central
equipment location.
2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1 14- by- 4 -by -12 -inch grounding bus.
3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
F. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch - circuit conductors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic- welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect -type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug -type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond
across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base_ of each comer
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
3.4 LABELING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article
for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. Label Text: If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,
notify the facility manager."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10
ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3
ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
5. Substations and Pad- Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms
B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products
and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.IM, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
05/15/2012
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4, factory- fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERIC() International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
05/15/2012
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA -4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory- fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non - armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36 /A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Mechanical - Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type, zinc - coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA -4 or MSS SP -58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex . head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
5. Toggle Bolts: A11 -steel springhead type.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED .METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
1) Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports. for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps .
05/15/2012
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be
supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface - Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units..
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP -69 .
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted - channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic- restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
05/15/2012
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B. Use 3000 -psi , 28 -day compressive - strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete ."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field- painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on
miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply .
galvanizing - repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3. Metal wireways.
4. Surface raceways.
5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets,
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
• 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. PIVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their
mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Source quality- control reports.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following :
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. O- Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.
7. Republic Conduit.
8. Robroy Industries.
9. Southwire Company.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and
NFPA 70.
2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
F. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
05/15/2012
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following :
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. Electri -Flex Company.
8. Kraloy.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Niedax - Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
11. RACO; a Hubbell company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. RNC: Type EPC -40 -PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated,
D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
E. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Cooper B -Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
3. Mono - Systems, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric,
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
required, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold -down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.TCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following :
1. Adalet.
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse - Hinds.
3. EGS /Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
8. Kraloy.
9. Milbank Manufacturing. Co.
10. Mono - Systems, Inc.
11. O- Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
12. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
13. Robroy Industries.
14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
15. Stahlin Non - Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
17. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E. Metal Floor Boxes:
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
05/15/2012
1. Material: Cast metal .
2. Type: Fully adjustable .
3. Shape: Rectangular.
4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 501b.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
H. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast
aluminum with gasketed cover.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2 -1/8 inches by 2 -1/8 inches deep .
K. Gangable boxes are allowed .
L. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-
hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise required.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
M. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC .
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC .
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 -PVC , direct buried .
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R .
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: IMC .
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC . Raceway locations include the
following:
a. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet- handling units.
b. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: IMC .
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch trade size.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F .
3.2 INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor- Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC minimum.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA H3 2.20.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Change from RNC to rigid steel conduit before penetrating slab. Arrange stub -ups so curved
portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90- degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15 /2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install
conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines whether exposed or concealed. Confirm
routing with Architect prior to routing exposed raceway.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximuml0-foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
J. Stub -ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed. to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1 -1/4 -inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1 -1/2 -inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
1. Use IMC for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub -ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2 -inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200 -1b tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
R. Surface Raceways:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2 -inch radius control at bend points.
2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor -type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.
Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue
are not acceptable support methods.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
05/15/2012
V. Expansion -Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds
100 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature
change. -
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install
fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
LFMC flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to
vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured
to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
EE. Paint exposed raceway in finished spaces to match adjacent surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct- Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in
nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3 After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie -in point, and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the
coupling.
b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of
60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding
bushings on terminations at equipment.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried
conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of
conduit.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Spring isolators.
3. Restrained spring isolators.
4. Channel support systems.
5. Restraint cables.
6. Hanger rod stiffeners.
7. Anchorage bushings and washers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used
electrical supports and installation requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC -ES: ICC - Evaluation Service.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic - Restraint Loading:
1. Seismic Design Category as Defined in the IBC: D .
2. Assigned Occupancy Category as Defined in the IBC: IV.
3. Refer to structural drawings for particular IBC design parameters.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
05/15/2012
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic - restraint component used.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FT.ECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality - control test reports.
05/15/2012
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
3. Restrained - Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined
loads.
B. Delegated- Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic - restraint details indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
a. Coordinate design calculations with-wind-load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other electrical Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and
anchorage devices.
3. Field- fabricated supports.
4. Seismic - Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the
basis for approval (tests or calculations).
A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with
other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
L6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic- restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI. I/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
D. Seismic- restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC -ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic - restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic -
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
I. Ace Mountings Co., Inca
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water - resistant neoprene .
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open - spring isolators.
05/15/2012
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Pads : Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that
match requirements of supported equipment.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not Iess than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators : Freestanding, steel, open - spring isolators with seismic or limit -
stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory- drilled baseplate bonded to 1 /4- inch - thick, neoprene or
rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting
and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit -stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3 Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
2.2 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. California Dynamics Corporation.
3. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Hilti Inc.
5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.
6. Mason Industries.
7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.
8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application
requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will
be subjected.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15 /2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Channel Support System: MFMA -3, shop- or field- fabricated support assembly made of slotted
steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion - resistant coating;
and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted- support- system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
F. Bushings for Floor- Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall - Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices.
H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One - piece, molded, oil- and water - resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc- coated steel for
interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength
required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times
diameter.
J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled -in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate -based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc- coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory- assembled and - tested equipment
before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic - control devices to indicate
capacity range.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
05/15/2012
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic - control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in -place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic- Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.
2. Install resilient, bolt - isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3. Install seismic- restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
13. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall - mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment - mounting channels are attached to wall.
C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
D. Drilled -in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc - coated steel anchors for interior and stainless -steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to
a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
05/15/2012
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least
seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load - spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.6 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION 260548
05/15/2012
A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
1. Component Response Modification Factor: [1.5] [2.5] [3.5] [5.0].
2. Component Amplification Factor: [1.0] [2.5].
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground -line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive- attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.4 COORDINATION
05/15/2012
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,
standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field .
2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."
D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear
adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E. Snap - Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway
or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Snap - Around, Color- Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid - colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit
diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
G. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use
with self - locking cable tie fastener.
2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
05/15/2012
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each cable size.
B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant
coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Self - Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted , 3 -mil- thick flexible label with
acrylic pressure - sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather - and chemical- resistant, self-
laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the
clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Heat - Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame - retardant polyolefin tube with machine - printed
identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies.
Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use
with self - locking cable tie fastener.
F. Snap - Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
G. Snap - Around, Color - Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid - colored acrylic sleeve, 2
inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color- Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
B. Self - Adhesive, Self - Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted , 3 -mil- thick flexible label with
acrylic pressure - sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather - and chemical - resistant, self -
laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such
that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
C. Snap - Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D. Snap - Around, Color- Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid- colored acrylic sleeve
with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
E. Heat - Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame - retardant polyolefin tube with machine - printed
identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it
identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl- cloth, self - adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2 -inch- wide, 5 -mil pressure - sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl
overlay.
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20
sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black.
05/15/2012
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face .
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV- resistant seal for label.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV- resistant seal for label.
C. Self - Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall
be 1 inch .
2.7 CABLE TIES
A. General- Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black except where used for color- coding.
B. UV- Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,
self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Plenum -Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V -0.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.
5. Color: Black.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
05/15/2012
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self- Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self - adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self - adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with
adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
G. System Identification Color - Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color- coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two -color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and .floors,
at 50 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested
areas.
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general - purpose type, except as listed below:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Outdoors: UV- stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
J. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches
overall.
K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
05/15/2012
A. Accessible Raceways and Metal -Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self - adhesive vinyl label or self -
adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at 30 -foot maximum intervals.
B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self - adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend
and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
C. Power - Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color - coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color- Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors
listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch - circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied.
b. Colors for 208/120 -V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 480/277 -V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field - Applied, Color- Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half - lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
D. Power- Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive -
backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
E. Install instructional sign including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive -film -type labels.
F. Control - Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,
manholes, and handholes, use self - adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels or self - adhesive
vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.
G. Control- Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations
provide heat - shrink preprinted tubes, self - adhesive, self - laminating polyester labels or self -
adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field - installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory - installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground -line warning tape to direct- buried cables.
2. Install underground -line warning tape for both direct -buried cables and cables in
raceway.
J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush- mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self -
adhesive warning labels .
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
IDENTIFICATION FOR FT.ECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8 -inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer .
N. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
providedwith its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label . Unless otherwise indicated, provide a
single line of text with 1/2 -inch- high letters on 1 -1/2 -inch- high label; where two
lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label .
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self - adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided : by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self - adhesive,
engraved , laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
h. Motor - control centers.
i. Enclosed switches.
j. Enclosed circuit breakers.
k. Enclosed controllers.
1. Variable -speed controllers.
m. Push- button stations.
n. Power transfer equipment.
o. Contactors.
p. Remote - controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
q. Power - generating units.
r. Monitoring and control equipment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
END OF SECTION 260553
05/15/2012
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068.(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes computer - based, fault- current and overcurrent protective device
coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device
coordination study.
1. Coordination of series -rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For coordination -study specialist.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination -study and fault - current -study computer software
programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for
system protective devices has been completed. Submittals may be in digital form.
1. Coordination -study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
3. Coordination -Study Report.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B. Coordination -Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible
for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision
and control of engineer.
C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short- circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
05/15/2012
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
companies offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
B. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
I. CGI CYME.
2. EDSA Micro Corporation.
3. ESA Inc.
4. Operation Technology, Inc.
5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with IEEE 399.
1. Optional Features:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
05/15/2012
B. Analytical features of fault - current -study computer software program shall include
"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time- current-
characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer - generated, time - current coordination plots.
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
05/15/2012
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and
involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment
designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams,
overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device
settings.
2. Impedance of utility service entrance.
3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard -copy and electronic -copy formats,
showing the following:
a. Circuit - breaker and fuse - current ratings and types.
b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, and X/R ratios.
d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
f. Busway ampacity and impedance.
g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross - referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full -load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal - damage curve.
d. Generator thermal- damage curve.
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g. Time - current- characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long -time adjustment range, short -time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere -tap adjustment range, time -delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor - control center ampacity, and interrupting rating
in amperes rms symmetrical.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
05/15/2012
A. Calculate the maximum available short- circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit -
breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
current immediately after initiation and for a three -phase bolted short circuit at each of the
following:
1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.
2. Motor - control center.
3. Distribution panelboard.
4. Branch circuit panelboard.
B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system - switching configurations
and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.
1. Transformers:
2. Medium - Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.
3. Low - Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
4. Low - Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
E. Study Report:
a. ANSI C57.12.10.
b. ANSI C57.12.22.
c. ANSI C57.12.40.
d. IEEE C57.12.00.
e. IEEE C57.96.
1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents
on electrical distribution system diagram.
F. Equipment Evaluation Report:
1. For 600 -V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2 -cycle symmetrical fault current.
2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2 -cycle symmetrical fault current.
3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three -phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground -fault currents. Ensure that short- circuit withstand ratings are equal
to or higher than calculated 1/2 -cycle symmetrical fault current.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 COORDINATION STUDY
05/15/2012
A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault- current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2 -cycle short- circuit currents.
2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-
circuit currents.
3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground -fault currents.
B. Comply with IEEE 241and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.
b. Self-cooled, full -load current or forced - air - cooled, full -load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-
32 -382, ICEA P-45 -482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short- circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures . that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short- circuit current.
F. Coordination -Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
coordination study:
1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay - current transformer ratios; and tap, time -dial, and instantaneous - pickup
values.
c. Circuit - breaker sensor rating; and long -time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
d. Fuse- current rating and type.
e. Ground -fault relay - pickup and time -delay settings.
2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
OVERCURRENTPROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
END OF SECTION 260573
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods
where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:
a. Device tag.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. Three -phase and single -phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault- current cutoff point.
G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
05/15/2012
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 6
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Photoelectric switches.
2. Lighting contactors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall -box dimmers, wall- switch occupancy sensors,
and manual light switches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light -level sensors.
1. Interconnection diagrams showing field- installed wiring.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality - control reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
5/15/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
5/15/2012
3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 -VA tungsten or 1000 -VA
inductive , to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with
UL 773A.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed
light sources from causing turn-off.
3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Surge Protection: Metal -oxide varistor.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base- and -stem mounting or
stem - and - swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky
exposure.
C. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load,
complying with UL 773.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2 Light -Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
3. Time Delay: Thirty- second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Lightning Arrester: Air -gap type.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.
2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allen - Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3. Eaton Corporation.
4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total
Lighting Control.
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination -type lighting contactors
with fusible switch , complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high - inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
5/15/2012
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings , matching the NEMA
type specified for the enclosure.
23 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote - Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded- copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low- Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded - copper conductors not smaller
thanNo. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling- mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire- suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure -
borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory - installed vibration
isolators.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power - limited and nonpower-
limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and
perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
5/15/2012
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other- than - normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set
time delay to suit Owner's operations.
2. Align high -bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements
for low - voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 260943.13
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4
•
END OF SECTION 260923
5/15/2012
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
"Addressable- Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay -Based Lighting
Controls."
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch - circuit panelboards.
3. Load centers.
4. Electronic -grade panelboards.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.3. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI /ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short- circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Include time - current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log -log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C. Field Quality - Control Reports:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Time - current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
Two spares for each panelboard.
3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power - Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for
each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site
testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70;
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
05/15/2012
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Surface - mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface - mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush- mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Finishes:.
a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after
cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel Same finish as panels and trim.
c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective
devices and other components.
4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder or metal
frame with transparent protective cover.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom .
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
05/15/2012
1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus - Configured Terminators: Compression type.
4. Feed- Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
F. Panelboard Short- Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series - connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type
of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series - connected short- circuit
rating by an NRTL.
G. Panelboard Short- Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short- circuit
current available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA P13 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker .
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Plug -in or Bolt -on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit- Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug -in circuit breakers where individual positive- locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5
•
•
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH - CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by Square
D or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch - circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug -in circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series - connected rating or
interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time - current element for low -level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -
mounted, field - adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field- replaceable rating plug or field -
replicable electronic trip; and the following field- adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I response.
4. Current - Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let - through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK -5.
5. Molded -Case Circuit - Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
05/15/2012
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
05/15/2012
b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high - intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding fire alarm and dedicated emergency
lighting circuit - breaker handles in on position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1. Fuses, and Spare -Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813
"Fuses."
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 . INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field - adjustable, circuit - breaker trip ranges.
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
1. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
05/15/2012
A. Identify field - installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before .installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory - authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
b. Follow -up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow -up infrared scan of
each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
13. Set field- adjustable circuit - breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load - balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy /working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24 -hour services such as fax
machines and on -line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is
not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I . Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Weather - resistant receptacles.
3. Communications outlets.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch - circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio - frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Receptacles for Owner - Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality- control reports.
05/15/2012
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device - Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour /Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2.2 GENERAL WIRING - DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
2.3 STRAIGHT -BLADE RECEPTACLES
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
05/1 5/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing -
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
B. Manufacturers' Models: Models listed may be outdated. Utilize manufacturer's conversion
chart to determine current model number.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug -in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5 -20R, UL 498, and FS W -C -596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description:
1. Straight blade, feed - through type.
2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W -C -596.
3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer
provides proper GFCI protection.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; VGF20.
b. Hubbell; GFR5352L.
c. Pass & Seymour; 2095.
d. Leviton; 7590.
2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W -S -896.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Single Pole:
2) Cooper; AH1221.
3) Hubbell; HBL1221.
4) Leviton; 1221 -2.
5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20ACI.
6) Two Pole:
7) Cooper; AH1222.
8) Hubbell; HBL1222.
9) Leviton; 1222 -2.
10) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.
11) Three Way:
12) Cooper; AH1223.
13) Hubbell; HBL1223.
14) Leviton; 1223 -2.
15) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.
16) Four Way:
17) Cooper; AH1224.
18) Hubbell; HBL1224.
05/15/2012
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
B. Wet - Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather -
resistant, die -cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Device Color:
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
19) Leviton; 1224 -2.
20) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.
05/15/2012
1. Plate- Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel .
3. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring - loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Device Installation:
05/15/2012
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two- thirds to three - fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20 -A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device - mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up , and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right .
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non - feed - through -type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is
not required.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped,
or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire
markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
END OF SECTION 262726
05/15/2012
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital- display indicators of measurement.
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15 -A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Test straight -blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99.
Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz..
D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 -V ac and less for use in enclosed switches
2. Spare -fuse cabinets.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare -fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to
accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,
local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
3. Current - limitation curves for fuses with current - limiting characteristics.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.
2. Current - limitation curves for fuses with current - limiting characteristics.
3. Time - current coordination curves (average melt) and current - limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let - through current) for each type and rating of fuse.
4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
FUSES 262813 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG-88880003)
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
two of each size and type.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single
source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
05/15/2012
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C)
or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C) , apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment
factors to fuse ratings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2. Edison Fuse, Inc.
3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
4. Littelfuse, Inc.
FUSES 262813 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent
with circuit voltages.
2.3 SPARE -FUSE CABINET
05/15/2012
A. Characteristics: Wall - mounted steel unit with full - length, recessed piano - hinged door and key -
coded cam lock and pull.
1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm -) high letters on exterior of
door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of' equipment.
D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Cartridge Fuses:
1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 , time delay.
2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay .
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
FUSES 262813 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Install spare -fuse cabinet(s) at location designated during construction or as indicated on
drawings.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
05/15/2012
FUSES 262813 - 4
•
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 0I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Enclosures.
B. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7
• 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include
dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short- circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
05/15/2012
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality- control reports.
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's field service report.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical . Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 COORDINATION
05/15/2012
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches and components with equipment served and
adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace .clearances and required clearances for
equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler- Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate required fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with
environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R .
3. Kitchen and Wash -Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X , stainless steel .
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4 .
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall- mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Install fuses in fusible devices.
D. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field- installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated - plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
05/15/2012
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.5 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION 262816
05/15/2012
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Enclosed switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations after remedial action.
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Nonautomatic transfer switches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
C. Field quality - control reports.
05/15/2012
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material
lists for each switch specified.
1. Single -Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation
switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined
transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
L4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay - setting and calibration instructions,
including software, where applicable.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of
notification.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is .a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain nonautomatic transfer switches through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application..
E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with NFPA 99.
H. Comply with NFPA 110.
I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Contactor Transfer Switches:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
a. AC Data Systems, Inc.
b. Caterpillar; Engine Div:
c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.
d. Generac Power Systems, Inc.
e. GE Zenith Controls.
f. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.
g. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
h. Russelectric, Inc.
i. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER- SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
B. Transfer Switches Using Molded -Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
a. AC Data Systems, Inc.
b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler- Hammer.
c. GE Zenith Controls.
d. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
e. Lake Shore Electric Corporation.
05/15/2012
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total
system transfer, including tungsten filament Iamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch
ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault- Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective
devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault - current protection, rating of switch and trip
unit combination shall exceed indicated fault - current value at installation location.
C. Solid -State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or
better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage -surge
withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall
meet or exceed voltage - impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-
motor- operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -rated current
between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded -case switches or circuit breakers or insulated -case
circuit - breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load - current switching. Retain paragraph
below and select appropriate option if four -pole transfer switches are required. See
Editing Instruction No. 4 in the Evaluations. Coordinate with Drawings.
G. Neutral Switching. Where four -pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched
simultaneously with phase poles .
H. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.
1. Float type rated 10 A.
2. Ammeter to display charging current.
3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.
Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,
either by color -code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.
Color - coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring
indicated.
2. Power - Terminal Arrangement and Field- Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
J. Enclosures: General - purpose NEMA 250, Type 1 , complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate
Source." Switch shall be capable of transferring load in either direction with either or both
sources energized.
B. Double -Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops
during switching sequence.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Nonautomatic Transfer - Switch Accessories:
05/15/2012
1. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
2. Source - Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer - switch normal - and
alternate- source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternate
Source Available."
3. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: One set of normally closed contacts for each switch
position, rated 10 A at 240 -V ac.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure
proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time -delay settings for
compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with
NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according
to seismic - restraint details. See Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
B. Floor - Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more
than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases
according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems. ".
E. Set field- adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU - 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground with insulation -
resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages
and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of
barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. Ground -Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground -fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested
component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and
related equipment as specified below.
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 263600
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 -
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes lightning protection for structures .
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1. Ground rods.
2. Ground loop conductor.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. System Certificate:
05/15/2012
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.
1. Layout of the Iightning protection system, along with details of the components to be
used in the installation.
2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be
met, and calculations required by NFPA•780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal
bodies.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or
certification by UL.
B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing
material.
C. Field quality- control reports.
D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of
Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.
E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as -built locations of grounding
features, including the following:
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL , trained and approved for installation of units
required for this Project.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. UL Master Label.
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
a. East Coast Lightning Equipment. Inc.
b. ERICO International Corporation.
c. Harger.
d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.
e. Independent Protection Co.
f. Preferred Lightning Protection.
g. Robbins Lightning, Inc.
h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.
05/15/2012
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780,
"Definitions" Article.
A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and
components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal
bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.
B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and
Installer.
C. Flashings of through -roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.
2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.
B. Roof - Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I , copper unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less
than half the height of the terminal.
3. Single- Membrane, Roof - Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-
membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections.
C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper .
D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.
E. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 5/8 inch in diameter by 96 inches long.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
F. Heavy -Duty, Stack - Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Solid copper .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
05/15/2012
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp
bends.
C. Conceal the following conductors:
1. System conductors.
2. Down conductors.
3. Interior conductors.
4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.
D. Cable Connections: Use exothermic- welded connections for all conductor splices and
connections between conductors and other components.
1. Exception: In single -ply membrane roofing, exothermic- welded connections may be
used only below the roof level.
E. Air Terminals on Single -Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightning protection
components.
G. Ground Loop: Install ground- level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the
perimeter of structure .
1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation.
2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.
3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet of grade
level.
H. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate -level interconnection loop conductors
to grounded metal bodies of building at 60 -foot intervals.
3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in
the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such
materials.
B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of
conductors.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Notify Architect at Ieast 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning
protection components.
B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.
C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.
END OF SECTION 264113
05/15/2012
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU006S
SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT- VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field - mounted TVSS for low - voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and
control equipment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. - Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights,
electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Product Certificates:. For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.
C. Field quality- control reports.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For TVSS devices to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site
testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.
D. Comply with UL 1283 and UL 1449.
TRANSIENT- VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 264313 - 1
POWER CIRCUITS
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system
operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F.
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet above sea level.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field- mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate clearances for
maintenance.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Cord - Connected, Plug -in Surge Suppressors: Manufacturer's standard
form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electronic equipment connected to
circuits protected by surge suppressors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject' to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. ABB USA.
2. AC Data Solutions.
3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
4. Atlantic Scientific.
5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.
6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products.
7. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit.
8. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
05/15/2012
TRANSIENT- VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 264313 - 2
POWER CIRCUITS
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
9. Intermatic, Inc.
10. LEA International.
11. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.
13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power.
14. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
15. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.
13. Surge Protection Devices:
05/15/2012
1. Comply with UL 1449.
2. Non - modular design.
3. Fuses, rated at 200 -kA interrupting capacity.
4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
5. Integral disconnect switch.
6. Redundant suppression circuits.
7. Redundant replaceable modules.
8. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus,
and ground bus.
9. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
10. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
11. Form -C contacts rated at 5 A and 250 -V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge
diversion module or on opening of any current - limiting device. Coordinate with building
power monitoring and control system.
12. Four -digit transient -event counter set to totalize transient surges.
C. Peak Single - Impulse Surge Current Rating: 320 kA per mode /640 kA per phase.
D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8- by- 20- mic.sec waveform described in IEEE
C62.41.2
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3- phase, 3 -wire, delta circuits
shall be as follows:
1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V .
2. Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V .
2.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1 .
TRANSIENT- VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 264313 - 3
POWER CIRCUITS
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU4468
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
05/1512012
A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
"Surge Arresters, Low - Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance
with test parameters.
2. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until TVSS devices
are installed and connected.
B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS
installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately
after the testing is over.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain TVSS devices.
END OF SECTION 264313
TRANSIENT - VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 264313 - 4
POWER CIRCUITS
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, Iamps, and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixture supports.
B. Related Sections:
05/15/2012
1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and
contactors.
2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Ballast, including BF.
3. Energy - efficiency data.
4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy - efficiency data for lamps.
5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing .& Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture
type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to
those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be
certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for
remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.
b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a
manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation . under the National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
c. Submit electronic file in .ies format.
d. Only submit photometric data if submitting fixture other than specified on
drawings.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Lighting fixtures.
2. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.
3. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.
c.
d. Access panels.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi -level and dimmer - controlled fixtures, from
manufacturer.
D. Field quality - control reports.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one ()leach type.
3. Fluorescent - fixture - mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency
lighting unit.
4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
INTERIOR. LIGHTING 265100 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers`
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended Iocation and application.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire -
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery - powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty
for the remaining nine years.
2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Seven years from date
of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty
for the remaining six years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Alera Lighting.
2. Capri.
3. Columbia Lighting.
4. Day - Brite.
5. Dual -Lite.
6. Emco.
7. Focal Point.
8. Gardco.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
9. Gotham.
10. Holophane Lighting.
11. Hubbell Industrial Lighting.
12. Hydrel.
13. Kim Lighting.
14. Lightolier.
15. Lithonia Lighting.
16. mcPhilben.
17. Nitebrites.
18. Omega.
19. Peerless.
20. Prescolite.
21. Sportsliter
22. Williams.
05/15/2012
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relarnping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from failing accidentally during
relarnping and when secured in operating position.
G. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
H. Factory- Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T -5, T -8, T -12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,
triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for
HID luminaires.
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
I. Electromagnetic - Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic
interference as required by MIL - STD -461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each
ballast indicated to require a filter.
2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:
1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.
2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi -level
control is indicated.
4. Sound Rating: Class A .
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
6. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.88 or higher.
9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
10. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall
be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed -start ballasts.
C. Electronic Programmed -Start Ballasts for T5, T8, or T5HO Lamps: Comply with
ANSI C82.11 and the following:
1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high -power factor,
Class P, and having automatic -reset thermal protection.
1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
05/15/2012
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
05/15/2012
E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in
the field.
1. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,
controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Description: Electronic - programmed rapid -start type, complying with UL 935 and with
ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for
full light output unless dimmer or bi -level control is indicated:
1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: Class A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio- frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT
A. Internal Type: Self- contained, modular, battery- inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting
fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one Insert number fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at
an output of minimum 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery- inverter
unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel- cadmium type.
5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid - state, constant - current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery - inverter unit, suitable for powering one or
more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect
unswitched circuit to battery - inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously.
3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel - cadmium type.
4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid- state, constant - current type.
5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
6. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
05/15/2012
A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal - Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and .UL 1029.
Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant - wattage autotransformer or regulating high - power - factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single -lamp ballasts.
3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Open - circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
5. Low -Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
B. Electronic Ballast for Metal - Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single -lamp ballasts.
2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F.
3. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit.
4. Sound Rating: Class A.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio - frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
10. Protection: Class P thermal' cutout.
C. High- Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid -state igniter /starter.
Igniter /starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter /starter-
case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Instant - Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid -state potted module, factory
installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to
150 W.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
05/15/2012
2.7 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER
A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer.
Comply with UL 1598.
B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the
fixture is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages.
C. Connections: Designed for a single branch - circuit connection.
D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately
60 percent light output.
2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. T8 rapid -start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens
(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours
unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 HID LAMPS
A. High- Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K,
and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and
angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2 -inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 -inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc- coated steel, 12 gage .
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580 /A 580M, Composition 302 .or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage .
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16 -inch minimum diameter, cadmium - plated, threaded steel rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
05/15 /2012
A. Lighting fixtures:
1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires
for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary.
When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble,
clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that
recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance
between ballast and luminaire.
D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem- Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows:. Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit Iength of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires, or rods to
building structure.
E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Verify that self - luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements
in NFPA 101.
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU0068
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Burn -in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly; prior to occupancy by
Owner. Bum -in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage.
3.5 ADJUSTING
05/15/2012
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on -site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other - than - normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required after dark.
1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect or Engineer.
END OF SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
2. Poles and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
05/15/2012
1. Section 265100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior
surfaces of buildings.
1.2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M.
B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M.
C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf /sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M Ice Load Map.
1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph .
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0 .
b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years .
c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0 .
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected
area, and verification of indicated parameters.
2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
3. Details of installation and construction.
4. Luminaire materials.
5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/I5/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall
be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for
remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.
b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's
laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
6. Photoelectric relays.
7. Ballasts, including energy- efficiency data.
8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy - efficiency data.
9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
11. Anchor bolts for poles.
12. Manufactured pole foundations.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of
screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that
products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS -4 -M and that load
imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be
based on design calculations by a professional engineer.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
C. Field quality - control reports.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
05/15/2012
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of each
type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'
laboratories that are accredited . under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent
agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
E. .Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B. Store poles on decay- resistant- treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Retain factory- applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace products that fail in materials or .workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,
perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or
unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in
finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but
not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings .
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet
locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5
and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP -8 for parameters of lateral light
distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion - resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,
and UV radiation.
L Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
3. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging - resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory - assembled and - tested
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
M. Factory - Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual
for .Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind
welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if
present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC -SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal
Blast Cleaning," or SSPC -SP 8, "Pickling.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high- gloss, high -build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
b. Color: Match Architect's sample of manufacturer's standard color.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
N. Factory - Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA -M32); buff
complying with AA -M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax.
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear
coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA- M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 611.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Color: Dark bronze .
O. Factory- Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp diameter code (T -4, T -5, T -8, T -12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),
base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent
luminaires.
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for
HID luminaires.
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
05/15/2012
2.3 LUMINAIRE - MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory
set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15- second minimum time delay.
1. Relay with locking -type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.
2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on- off set points.
A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open - circuit operation without reduction
of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant - wattage autotransformer or regulating high - power - factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
B. Auxiliary, Instant -On, Quartz System: Factory- installed feature automatically switches quartz
lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System
automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light
output.
C. High- Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid -state igniter /starter and
capable of open - circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter /starter shall
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter /starter -case temperature of 90
deg C.
1. Instant- Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid -state potted module, factory
installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to
150 W.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.
2.5 HID LAMPS
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130 -V ac.
b. Maximum Voltage: 250 -V peak or 150 -V ac rms.
05/15/2012
A. Metal - Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with rninimum CRI 65 , and CCT color temperature 4000
K.
B. Pulse -Start, Metal - Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.
2.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS -4 -M.
1. Wind -Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.
2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of
luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be
used in pole selection strength analysis.
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless -steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion - resistant items compatible with support
components.
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication unless otherwise indicated.
3. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole -base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
E. Power- Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural
steel complying with ASTM A 36 /A 36M and hot -dip galvanized according to
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top -plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and
strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.
2.7 POLE ACCESSORIES
A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and
nuts. Finish same as pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires
and their mounting provisions on the pole.
13. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches .
2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet .
3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.
4.
C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
2 Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2- inch - diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.
D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
33 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In
concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010 -inch- thick, pipe- wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
3.4 GROUNDING
Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
05/15/2012
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Illumination Tests:
1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST
standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):
a. IESNA LM -5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting
Installations."
b. IESNA LM -50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations."
c. IESNA LM -52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations."
d. IESNA LM -64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."
e. IESNA LM -72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering
devices.
END OF SECTION 265600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
PROJECT NO.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 311000 — SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
05/15/2012
A. Clearing and grubbing includes, but is not limited to, removing from the Project site, trees,
stumps, roots, brush, structures, abandoned utilities, trash, debris and all other materials found
on or near the surface of the ground in the construction area and understood by generally
accepted engineering practice not to be suitable for construction of the type contemplated.
Precautionary measures that prevent damage to existing features, including trees, to remain
shall be part of the Work.
B. Clearing and grubbing operations shall be coordinated with temporary and permanent erosion
and sedimentation control procedures.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and laws of
local, municipal, state or federal authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. All required
permits of a temporary nature shall be obtained for construction operations by the Contractor.
B. Open burning WILL NOT be allowed
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Location of the Work: The area to be cleared and grubbed is shown schematically on the
Drawings or specified below. It includes all areas designated for construction, which is
typically limited to the utility easement shown.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish equipment of the type normally used in clearing and grubbing
operations including, but not limited to, tractors, trucks, loaders and root rakes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULING OF CLEARING
A. The Contractor shall clear at each construction site only that length of the right -of -way,
permanent or construction easement which would be the equivalent of two week's pipe laying.
This length shall be determined from the Contractor's Progress Schedule.
B. The Engineer may permit clearing for additional lengths of the pipe line provided that
temporary erosion and sedimentation controls are in place and a satisfactory stand of temporary
SITE CLEARING 311000 -1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
PROJECT NO.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
grass is established. Should a satisfactory stand of grass not be possible, no additional clearing
shall be permitted beyond that specified above.
C. A satisfactory stand of grass shall have no bare spots larger than one square yard. Bare
spots shall be scattered and the bare area shall not comprise more than one percent of any
given area.
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clear and grub no more than 3 feet on each side of the pipeline before excavating. Remove
all trees, growth, debris, stumps and other objectionable matter. Clear the construction
easement or road right -of -way only if necessary.
B. Materials to be cleared, grubbed and removed from the Project site include, but are not
limited to, all trees, stumps, roots, brush, trash, organic matter, paving, miscellaneous
structures, houses, debris and abandoned utilities.
C. Grubbing shall consist of completely removing roots, stumps, trash and other debris from
all graded areas so that topsoil is free of roots and debris. Topsoil is to be left sufficiently
clean so that further picking and raking will not be required.
D. All stumps, roots, foundations and planking embedded in the ground shall be removed and
disposed of. Piling and butts of utility poles shall be removed to a minimum depth of two
feet below the limits of excavation for structures, trenches and roadways or two feet below
finish grade, whichever is Iower.
E. Landscaping features shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, fences, cultivated
trees, cultivated shrubbery, property corners, man -made improvements, subdivision and
other signs within the right -of -way and easement. The Contractor shall take extreme care in
moving landscape features and promptly re- establishing these features.
F. Surface rocks and boulders shall be grubbed from the soil and removed from the site if not
suitable as rip rap.
G. Where the tree limbs interfere with utility wires, or where the trees to be felled are in close
proximity to utility wires, the tree shall be taken down in sections to eliminate the
possibility of damage to the utility.
H. Any work pertaining to utility poles shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate
utility.
I. All fences adjoining any excavation or embankment that, in the Contractor's opinion, may
be damaged or buried, shall be carefully removed, stored and replaced. Any fencing that, in
the Engineer's opinion, is significantly damaged shall be replaced with new fence material.
J. The Contractor shall exercise special precautions for the protection and preservation of
trees, cultivated shrubs., sod, fences, etc. situated within the limits of the construction area
but not directly within excavation and/or fill limits. The Contractor shall be held liable for
any damage the Contractor's operations have inflicted on such property.
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
PROJECT NO. ICU-0068(FG-88880003)
K. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs and/or replacement of all damages to
existing improvements resulting from Contractor's operations.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS
END OF SECTION 311000
05/15/2012
A. The debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing operation shall be hauled to a disposal site
secured by the Contractor and shall be disposed of in accordance with all requirements of
federal, state, county and municipal regulations. No debris of any kind shall be deposited in any
stream or body of water, or in any street or alley. No debris shall be deposited upon any private
property except with written consent of the property owner. In no case shall any material or
debris be left on the Project, shoved onto abutting private properties or buried on the Project.
SITE CLEARING 311000 -3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried utilities.
1.2 UNIT PRICES
A. Rock: Rock excavation is not anticipated.
B. Borrow materials are incidental to the project and will receive no separate payment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
05 /1 5/2012
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe and
to % pipe depth.
C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill.
D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Engineer.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and
boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing,
trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to
the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering,
ripping, or blasting, when permitted:
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late- model, track - mounted hydraulic
excavator; equipped with a 42 -inch- wide, short-tip- radius rock bucket; rated at not less
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
than 120 -hp flywheel power with bucket - curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf and
stick -crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf; measured according to SAE J -1179.
G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
H. Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
I. Select Backfill: Borrow pit material placed from 'A pipe depth to 18" above pipe.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
13. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each borrow soil material proposed for fill
and backfill.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock- definition testing, as documented
according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
3. Contact utility- locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
4. Contractor to repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer any aerial, surface, or subsurface
improvements damaged during the course of the work not indicated to be removed on the
plans.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or
a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
ASTM C33, Graduation #67.
F. Select Backfill: Georgia DOT Type 1, Class I and II.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
05/15/2012
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities as manufactured by Reef
Industries or approved equal. Color shall be blue with printed message "Caution Water Main
Line Buried Below ".
B. Detectable Tape: Detectable tape as manufactured by Reef Industries of Houston, Texas, or
equal shall be installed during the backfill operation at a point 1 foot below the final finished
grade.
C. The detectable tape shall be a 5.5 mil composition film containing one layer of metalized foil
laminate between two layers of inert plastic film specifically formulated for prolonged use
underground. The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive agents
found in the soils.
D. The detectable tape shall bear a continuous printed message "Caution Water Main Line Buried
Below." The message shall be printed in permanent ink formulated for prolonged use
underground. Letters shall be clearly legible and have a minimum height of 1.2 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15 /2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
1. Provide dewatering as indicated in Section 312319.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing
explosives to Project site or using explosives on Project site. All precautions must be taken to
prevent damage to public or private property or to persons. The Contractor shall assume full
liability for any damage that may occur during the use of explosives. No blast shall be used
within 50 feet of pipe already installed.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock
excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in
the Contract Documents.
B. Excavation methods shall meet or exceed Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) construction industry standards.
C. Excavation shall proceed in a conventional manner with satisfactory effort made to remove hard
materials before the Engineer makes a determination of need for blasting. Predrilling and
blasting will be allowed, if the Contractor can provide evidence for the Engineer's review that
boring logs show that material cannot be excavated. Evidence will be provided for the
Engineer's review and approval before predrilling and blasting is undertaken.
D. All shoring, sheeting, and bracing required to perform and protect the excavation and to
safeguard the employees and the public shall be performed. The failure of the Engineer to
direct the placing of such protection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
damage resulting from its omission. Whenever sheeting is driven to a depth below the elevation
of the top of pipe, that portion of the sheeting below the elevation of the top of the pipe shall not
be disturbed or removed. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off not less than 1 foot below
fmished grade. No sheeting shall be removed until the excavation is substantially backfilled as
hereinafter specified.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. Excavation shall be
made by the open cut method unless otherwise specified or shown on the .plans.
B. Except where otherwise indicated, trench bottoms shall be not less than 12 inches wider nor
more than 16 inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall be
excavated true to line, so that a clear space of not less than 6 inches nor more than 8 inches in
width is provided on each side of the pipe.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for
bedding course. }land excavate for bell of pipe.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.6 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Resident Inspector when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Resident Inspector determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and
replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Resident Inspector.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavations as directed by Engineer.
3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. During excavation, material suitable for backfill shall be stored in an orderly manner a
minimum distance of one times the depth of the excavation back from the edges of the trenches
to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C. Place and compact initial backfill of select backfill material to a height of 18 inches over the
utility pipe or conduit. Fill shall be placed in 6 inch layers.
1. Carefully compact material around pipe and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
utility system.
D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. Pipe joints, gravity blocks, service connections,
and conflicts shall be left exposed until visually inspected and approved by the Utilities
Inspector.
E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is
removed.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand - operated tampers.
B. Place backfill . and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil in areas not subject to traffic to not less than the following percentages of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:
1. Select backfill material up to 18" above top of pipe, compact each layer of backfill or fill
material at 92 percent.
2. Backfill material from 18" above pipe to ground surface, compact each layer of backfill
or fill material at 85 percent.
3.11 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to prevent ponding.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality - control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for
each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded,
rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or
weather conditions.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
05/15/2012
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
3.15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Excavation and backfilling for pipelines and appurtenances, expect as hereinafter provided for,
will be considered as incidental to the construction of the various elements of the installation it
is associated with, and no separate payment will be made therefore.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. When made at the direction of the Engineer, overcut, rock excavation and backfill to
compensate for rock will be made at the unit contract price for rock excavation per cubic
yard measured in place.
C. When made at the direction of the Engineer, overcut and backfill to compensate for
inadequate foundation will be paid for at the unit contract price for overcut and clean stone
bedding, per ton of stone.
END OF SECTION 312000
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes construction dewatering.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, provide, test, operate, monitor, and maintain a dewatering
system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground -water flow into excavations and
permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Work includes removing dewatering system when no longer needed.
2. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion is controlled, stability of excavations
and constructed slopes is maintained, and flooding of excavation and damage to
structures are prevented.
3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility
and perform dewatering who has specialized in installing dewatering systems similar to those
required for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
05/15/2012
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
B. Project Site Information: Groundwater levels have been recorded at several locations along the
sewer route. These locations and groundwater levels are indicated on the plans. Owner will not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. The
contractor is responsible for making additional test borings or other exploratory operations to
determine extent of groundwater conditions throughout the project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
DEWATERING 312319 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding
on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. Protect subgrades and
foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
3.2 DEWATERING
END OF SECTION 312319
05/15/2012
A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water
disposal, and surface -water controls.
13. Before excavation below ground -water level, place system into operation and then operate it
continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have
been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.
C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation,
construction of structures, and placement of fill materials.
D. Dispose of water removed from excavations in a manner to avoid endangering public health,
property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner
to avoid inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow- control
devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well
holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.
DEWATERING 312319 - 2
Ft. Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. ICU -0068(FG - 88880003)
SECTION 31 25 00 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
5/15/2012
A. The Work specified in this Section consists of providing and maintaining temporary and
permanent erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the Drawings. This Section
also specifies the subsequent removal of temporary erosion and sedimentation controls.
B. Temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation controls include grassing and
mulching of disturbed areas and structural barriers at those locations which will ensure that
erosion during construction will be maintained within acceptable limits. Acceptable limits
are as established by the Georgia Erosion and Sedimentation Control Act of 1975, as
amended, Section 402 of the Federal Clean Water Act, and applicable codes, ordinances,
rules, regulations, and laws of local, state, and municipal authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Land disturbance activity shall not commence until the Land Disturbance Permit has been
issued.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 of these
Specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures shown on the
Drawings are minimum suggested requirements. Any additional erosion and sedimentation
control measures required by the Contractor's means, methods, techniques, and sequence of
operation will be installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Perform all Work under this Section in accordance with all pertinent rules and regulations
including, but not necessarily limited to, those stated in these Specifications. Where
provisions of pertinent rules and regulations conflict with these Specifications the more
stringent provisions shall govern.
C. Provide all materials and promptly take all actions necessary to achieve effective erosion
and sedimentation control in accordance with the Georgia Erosion and Sedimentation
Control Act of 1975 as amended (OCGA §12 -7 -1, et. seq.), local ordinances, other permits,
local enforcing agency guidelines, and these Specifications.
D. Basic Principles:
1. Coordinate the land disturbance activities to fit the topography, soil types, and
conditions.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -1
Ft. Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2. Minimize the disturbed area and the duration of exposure to erosive elements.
3. Provide temporary or permanent stabilization to disturbed areas immediately
after rough grading is complete.
4. Safely convey run -off from the site to a stable outlet to prevent flooding and
damage to downstream facilities resulting from increased runoff from the site.
5. Retain sediment on -site that was generated on -site.
6. Minimize encroachment upon watercourses,
E. Implementation:
1. The Contractor is solely . responsible for the control of erosion within the Project
site and the prevention of sedimentation from leaving the Project site or entering
waterways.
2. The Contractor shall install temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation
controls which will ensure that runoff from the disturbed area of the Project site
shall pass through a filter system before exiting the Project site.
3. The Contractor shall provide temporary and permanent erosion and
sedimentation control measures to prevent silt and sediment from entering the
waterways and designated wetland areas. The Contractor shall maintain an
undisturbed vegetative buffer a minimum of 25 feet from the top of the bank.
4. The Contractor shall limit land disturbance activity to those areas shown on the
Drawings.
5. The Contractor shall maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures within
disturbed areas on the entire site at no additional cost to the Owner until the final
acceptance of the Project. Maintenance shall include mulching, re- seeding,
clean -out of sediment barriers and sediment ponds, replacement of washed -out or
undermined rip rap and erosion control materials, to the satisfaction of the Owner
and Engineer.
6. All fines imposed for improper erosion and sedimentation control shall be paid
by the Contractor.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SEDIMENT BARRIER
A. Silt Fence:
5/15/2012
1. Type C Silt Fence is a combination of Type A silt Fence with woven wire
reinforcement. Type C Silt Fence reinforcement shall meet the requirements of
Section 171 of Georgia D.O.T. Specifications.
2. Silt fence fabric shall be an approved product on the Georgia DOT Qualified
Product List No. 36, latest edition.
B. Hay Bales: Hay bales shall be clean, seed -free cereal hay, rectangular in shape, and contain
five cubic feet or more of material.
C. Concrete Blocks: Concrete blocks shall be hollow, non - load - bearing type.
D. Plywood shall be 3/4 -inch thick exterior type.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -2
Material
Section No.
Topsoil
893.01
Seed and Sod
890
Fertilizer
891.01
Agricultural Lime
882.02
Mulch
893.02
Inoculants
893.04
Ft. Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.2 CONSTRUCTION EXIT STONE
2.3 CONCRETE
2.4 RIP RAP
2.5 PLASTIC FILTER FABRIC
2.6 GRASSING
5/15/2012
A. Use sound, tough, durable stone resistant to the action of air and water. Slabby or shaley
pieces will not be acceptable. Aggregate size shall be in accordance with the National
Stone Association Size R -2 (1.5 to 3.5 -inch stone) or Type 3 rip rap stone conforming to
Section 805.01 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications.
Concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 321313 of these
Specifications for 3000 psi concrete.
A. Stone Rip Rap: Use sound, tough, durable stones resistant to the action of air and unless
noted otherwise, stone rip rap shall be Type 1.
1. Type 1 Rip Rap: Rip rap size and gradation shall conform to Section 805.01 of the
Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Type 1 Stone
Dumped Rip Rap.
2. Type 3 Rip Rap: Rip rap size and gradation shall conform to Section 805.01 of the
Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Type 3 Stone
Dumped Rip Rap.
B. Sand Cement Bag Rip Rap: Sand cement bag rip rap shall conform to the Georgia
Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, Section 603.
A. Plastic filter fabric shall conform to the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications, Section 881, for filter fabrics.
B. Plastic filter fabric shall be an approved product on the Georgia Department of
Transportation Qualified Product List No. 28, latest edition,
A. Grassing materials shall meet the requirements of the Georgia Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition; as shown in the table:
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -3
Ft. Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
5/15/2012
Seed species shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.
C. Mulch Binder: Mulch on slopes exceeding 3 (horizontal) to 1 (vertical) shall be held in
place by the use of a mulch binder, as approved by the Engineer. The mulch binder shall
be non -toxic to plant and animal life and shall be approved by the Engineer.
D. Water: Water shall be free of excess and harmful chemicals, organisms, and substances
which may be harmful to plant growth or obnoxious to traffic. Salt or brackish water shall
not be used. Water shall be furnished by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures shall prevent
erosion and prevent sediment from exiting the site. It in the opinion of the Owner,
Engineer, or state inspector, the Contractor's temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are inadequate, the Contractor shall provide additional maintenance for existing
measures or additional devices to control erosion and sedimentation on the site at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. All erosion and sedimentation control devices and structures shall be inspected by the
Contractor at least once a week and immediately after each rainfall occurrence. Any device
or structure found to be damaged shall be repaired or replaced immediately.
C. All erosion and sedimentation control measures and devices shall be constructed and
maintained as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein until adequate permanent
disturbed area stabilization has been provided and accepted by the Engineer. Once
adequate permanent stabilization has been provided and accepted by the Engineer, all
temporary erosion and sedimentation control structures and devices shall be removed.
3.2 SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. Construction Exit:
1. Construction exit(s) shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the
Engineer. A construction exit shall be located at any point traffic will be leaving a
disturbed area to a public right -of -way, street, alley, sidewalk, or parking area.
2. Placement of Construction Exit Material: The ground surface upon which the
construction exit material is to be placed shall be prepared to a smooth condition free
from obstructions, depressions or debris. The plastic filter fabric shall be placed to
provide a minimum number of overlaps and a minimum width of one foot of overlap
at each joint. The stone shall be placed with its top elevation conforming to the
surrounding ground elevations. The stone shall be dropped from no more than a
three feet height during construction.
3. Construction Exit Maintenance: The Contractor shall regularly maintain the exit with
the top dressing of stone to prevent tracking or flow of soil onto public rights -of -way
and paved surfaces as directed by the Engineer.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -4
Ft, Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. 1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Sediment Barriers:
3.3 EROSION CONTROL
A. Rip Rap
5/15/2012
4. Construction Exit Removal: Construction exit(s) shall be removed and properly
disposed of when the disturbed area has been properly stabilized, the tracking or flow
of soil onto public rights -of -way or paved surfaces has ceased and as directed by the
Engineer.
1. Sediment barriers shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, silt fences, hay
bales, and any device which prevents sediment from exiting the disturbed area.
2. Silt fences and hay bales shall not be used in any flowing stream, creek, or river.
3. Sediment barriers shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the
Owner or Engineer.
4. Sediment barriers shall be maintained to ensure the depth of impounded sediment is
no more than one -half of the original height of the barrier or as directed by the
Engineer. Tom, damaged, destroyed, or washed -out barriers shall be repaired,
reinforced, or replaced with new material and installed as shown on the Drawings
and as directed by the Owner or Engineer.
5 Accumulated sediment shall be removed from the barrier and replaced and stabilized
on -site as directed by the Owner or Engineer.
6. Sediment barrier shall be removed once the disturbed area has been stabilized with a
permanent vegetative cover and the sediment barrier is no longer required as directed
by the Engineer.
7. All non - biodegradable parts of the barrier shall be disposed of properly.
8. The disturbed area created by barrier removal shall be permanently stabilized.
C. Sediment Boxes: All inlet grates shall be covered with sediment boxes during grading
operations and shall remain so covered until all open areas are permanently stabilized
against erosion.
1. Rip rap shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
Rip rap shall be placed at all points where natural vegetation is disturbed on the
banks of active streams. Compact backfill and place rip rap to prevent subsequent
settlement and erosion. This requirement applies equally to construction alongside a
stream as well as crossing a stream or drainage ditch.
2. When trenching across a stream or drainage ditch, place rip rap over the entire
disturbed area upstream and downstream of the trench excavation. Place rip rap
across creek bottom, across creek banks, and extend rip rap placement five feet
beyond the top of each creek bank.
3. Preparation of Foundations: The ground surface upon which the rip rap is to be
placed shall be brought to the correct lines and grades before placement is
commenced. Where filling of depressions is required, the new material shall be
compacted with hand or mechanical tampers. Unless at creek banks or otherwise
shown or specified, rip rap shall begin in a toe ditch constructed in original ground
around the toe of the fill or the cut slope. The toe ditch shall be two feet deep in
original ground, and the side next to the fill or cut shall have that same slope. After
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -5
Ft. Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Grassing:
5/15/2012
the rip rap is placed, the toe ditch shall be backfilled and the excess dirt spread
neatly on the site.
4. Placement of Plastic Filter Fabric:
a. Plastic filter fabric shall be placed under all rip rap unless shown or specified
otherwise.
b. Filter fabric shall not be placed under rip rap on stream or drainage ditch
crossings.
c. The surface to receive filter fabric shall be prepared to a smooth condition free
from obstructions, depressions, and debris. The filter fabric shall be installed
with the long dimension running up the slope and shall be placed to provide a
minimum number of overlaps. The fabric shall be placed to provide a
minimum width of one foot of overlap at each joint. The fabric shall be
placed so that the upstream strip overlaps the downstream strip. The fabric
shall be anchored in place with securing pins of the type recommended by the
fabric manufacturer. Pins shall be placed on or within 3- inches of the
centerline of the overlap. The fabric • shall be placed loosely to avoid
stretching and tearing during placement of the stone. The fabric shall be
protected at all times during construction from clogging due to clay, silts,
chemicals, or other contaminants. Contaminated fabric or fabric damaged
during installation or during placement of rip rap shall be removed and
replaced with uncontaminated and undamaged fabric at no additional cost to
the Owner.
5. Placement of Rip Rap: Rip rap shall be placed on a 6 -inch layer of soil, crushed
stone or sand overlaying the filter fabric. Rip rap shall be placed with its top
elevation conforming with the finished grade or the natural existing slope of the
stream bank and stream bottom. The stone shall be dropped from no more than a
three foot height during construction. Stone rip rap shall be placed to provide a
uniform surface to the thickness shown on the Drawings. The thickness tolerance for
the course shall be —3 inches and +6 inches.
1. Temporary Stabilization: Temporary stabilization shall be provided as shown on the
Drawings and conforming to these Specifications to control erosion on the site.
Temporary stabilization shall be provided to any area that will not receive permanent
stabilization within the next 14 calendar days. Partial payment requests may be
withheld for those portions of the Project not complying with this requirement.
2. Permanent Stabilization:
a. Permanent stabilization shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and
conforming to these Specifications to control erosion on the site. Permanent
stabilization shall be provided to all areas of land disturbance within seven
calendar days of the completion of land disturbance for any area greater than 0.25
acre.
b. Where permanent stabilization cannot be immediately established because of an
inappropriate season, the Contractor shall provide temporary stabilization. The
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -6
Ft. Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No. ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
Contractor shall return to the site at the appropriate season to provide permanent
stabilization in areas that received only temporary stabilization.
3. Grassing shall meet the requirements of Section 700 of the Georgia Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition, unless specified otherwise.
4. Seed rate, fertilization and other requirements shall be provided as shown on the
Drawings.
3.4 CLEAN -UP
5/15/2012
A. Dispose of all excess erosion and sedimentation control materials in a manner satisfactory
to the Owner and Engineer.
B. Final clean -up shall be performed in • accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer.
END OF SECTION 312500
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 -7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG - 88880003)
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
05/15/2012
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure
process.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product.
1. Include the EPA - Registered Label for termiticide products.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report
for Owner's records and include the following:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project
is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products, and who is accredited by manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according
to the EPA - Registered Label.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7 WARRANTY
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT
05/15/2012
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the
EPA - Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground- supported slabs before
construction.
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and
Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment,
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is
discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
infestation.
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months continuing
service including monitoring, inspection, and re- treatment for occurrences of termite activity.
Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, terms
for agreement period, and terms for future renewal options.
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA - Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.
Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA- Registered
Label.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor.
b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75.
c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Dragnet FT, Talstar Prevail.
2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than
five years against infestation of subterranean termites.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions
affecting performance of termite control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite
control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials
such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood
from soil within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide
manufacturer.
1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer,
complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's EPA - Registered Label for products.
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 00.68(FG- 88880003)
3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA - Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1. Slabs -on- Grade: Under ground- supported slab construction, including footings, building
slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete
footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases;
and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil
washout around footings.
3. Masonry: Treat voids.
4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -
supported slabs are installed. ' Use waterproof barrier according to EPA - Registered Label
instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 313116
05/15/2012
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 321216 - HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: Hot -mix asphalt paving.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot -mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of the Georgia Department of Transportation and as indicated on the project
drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and
performance properties.
B. Job -Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot -mix asphalt
paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in- service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot -mix asphalt
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance.
1. Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with authorities
GADOT.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively
damp or if the following conditions are not met:
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 -. PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone or crushed gravel; complying with
ASTM D 692.
C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, or combinations
thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity - graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-
graded material.
B. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to state GADOT Standard Specification
Section 412.
C. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt,
slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
D. Water: Potable.
2.3 MIXES
05/15/2012
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C).
2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at
time of placement.
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C) at time
of placement.
1. For hot -mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
A. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types "; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Base Course: As indicated on project drawings.
2. Surface Course: As indicated on project drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
C. Notify Owner in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until
these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland
cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot -mix asphalt
pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L /sq. m) of surface.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound - aggregate base course. Do not
dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
B. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted - aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50
gal. /sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L /sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood,
surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
3.3 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot -mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted.
1. Place hot -mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
3. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears
in asphalt - paving mat.
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 COMPACTION
05/15/2012
B. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still
warm.
C. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper
alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly
using tamper or other satisfactory method.
D. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove
paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to
specified density and surface smoothness.
E. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
F. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 nun), no minus.
13. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm)
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm)
3.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving work as described in this section will be considered as incidental to the
construction of the various elements of the tank installation it is associated with, and no separate
payment will be made therefore.
END OF SECTION 321216
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Driveways.
2. Curbs and gutters.
3. Walkways.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast - furnace slag.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C. Field quality - control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies
with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as AC1 Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -0I or an equivalent certification program.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with AC1 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Concrete Testing Service: Design Build Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing
agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type
materials to provide full- depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
B. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire
into flat sheets.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
C. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,.
05/15/2012
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
E. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2. For epoxy - coated reinforcement, use epoxy- coated or other dielectric- polymer - coated
wire bar supports.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout the Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I,. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
B. Normal - Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 1N coarse aggregate, uniformly graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse - Aggregate Size: 1 -1/2 inches nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious
reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap - graded coarse
aggregate as follows:
1. Aggregate Sizes: 3/8 to 5/8 inch nominal.
2. Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color: Tan, round river pebble.
D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
E. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water - soluble chloride ions by mass
of cementitious material.
1. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4, High -Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
05/15/2012.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
5. High - Range, Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Water: Potable.
B. White Waterborne Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
1. Available Products:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 WP WB.
b. Burke by Edoco; Resin Emulsion White.
c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure 2000.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem White Pigmented Cure (J- 10 -W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez VOX White Pigmented.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 450.
h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure- White.
i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L &M Cure R -2.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1200- White.
k. Symons Corporation; Resi -Chem White.
1. Tamils Industries, Inc.; Horncure 200 -W.
m. Unitex; Hydro White.
n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Enviocure White 100.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation- Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, recycled rubber.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal- weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete
mixture designs for the trial batch method.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days):
a. Minimum Concrete Strengths: 4,000 PSI for concrete pavement
b. Minimum Concrete Strengths: 3,000 PSI for concrete sidewalks, curb and gutter.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
C. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal- weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: Exterior concrete shall have 5% - 7% air entrainment
D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water - reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements and as indicated in General Notes on
structural drawings.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
05/15/2012
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch; and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing
and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof -roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10 -wheel tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons.
3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch
require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been
corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
3.5 JOINTS
05/15/2012
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form - release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond - reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and
free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required
before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch overlap of adjacent mats.
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one -half hour unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway- section forms or bulkhead forms with keys,
unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1 /2 inches into concrete.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one
side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if
joint sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one -piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint -filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one - fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing
random contraction cracks.
2. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding
to one side of joint.
E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete.is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site.
F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
05/15/2012
G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between. transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate
with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately
in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without
being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Engineer.
J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,
submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed
concrete.
M. Slip -Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised
mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to
required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of
paver machine during operations.
N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength.
O. Cold - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
P. Hot - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot - weather conditions
exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time
of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water - soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power - driven
floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float - finished concrete,
perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 -
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU-0068(FG-88880003)
05/15/2012
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture - retaining -cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10 -foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6. Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.
7. Alignment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length
of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Engineer.
B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 -10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive- strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not Less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 3IM; cast and laboratory cure one set of
three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive - Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2
specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive - strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive -
strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive - strength test
value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive - strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7- and 28 -day tests.
E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Engineer.
G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 11
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
END OF SECTION 321313
05/15/2012
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Engineer, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks
or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portiand cement
concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 12
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold- applied joint sealants.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint- sealant product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint - sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
05/15/2012
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint- sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 COLD - APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.3 JOINT- SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint - sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by joint - sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold - Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and
density required to control joint - sealant depth and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot - Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control joint - sealant depth, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and
fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate
tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -200.
b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Gardox or equal.
05/15/2012
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.2 PREPARATION
05/15/2012
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint - sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint- sealant - substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Joint - Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install joint - sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint- sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint - sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent joint - sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint - sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:
1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint- sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
05/15/2012
A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 321373
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt pavement.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A, Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of Georgia DOT for pavement - marking work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
05/15/2012
A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at
a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for alkyd materials and not exceeding
95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Aexcel Inc.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co.
3. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.
4. Colurnbia Paint & Coatings.
5. Conco Paints.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
6. Coronado Paint; Division of INSL -X Products Corporation.
7. Diamond Vogel Paints.
8. Dunn - Edwards Corporation.
9. Ennis Traffic Safety Solutions, Inc.
10. Frazee Paint.
11. General Paint.
12. Kwal Paint.
13. M.A.B. Paints.
14. McCormick Paints.
15. Miller Paint.
16. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc.
17. PPG Industries.
18. Pratt & Lambert.
19. Rodda Paint Co.
20. Rohm and Haas Company; a subsidiary of The Dow Chemical Company.
21. Scott Paint Company.
22. Sherwin - Williams Company (The).
2.2 PAVEMENT- MARKING PAINT
05/15/2012
A. Pavement - Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with AASHTO M 248, Type N; colors complying with FS TT -P -1952.
1. Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Engineer.
B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 7 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions
indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide
a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint - resistant, die -cut stencils, firmly secured
to pavement. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint
application beyond the stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil.
3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 321723
05/15/2012
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Galvanized -steel chain link fabric.
2. Galvanized -steel framework.
3. Privacy Slats
4. Barbed Wire
05/15/2012
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for chain -link fences and gates.
1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
2. Chain -link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3. Gates and hardware.
4. Accessories: Privacy slats and barbed wire.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years' experience
and has completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and of similar scope
to that indicated for this Project with a successful construction record of in- service performance.
B. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings,
and fastenings, from a single source.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the Drawings in
relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRIC
A. Selvage: Knuckled at one selvage and twisted at the other for 2 -inch and 2 -1/8 -inch mesh sizes
and heights above 60 inches.
B. Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric: Height indicated on drawings. Fabricated in one -piece widths
for fencing 12 feet and less in height to comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
(CLFMI) "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below:
2.2 FRAMING
1. Mesh and Wire Size: 2 -inch mesh, 0.148 -inch diameter (9 gage).
2. Coating: ASTM A 817, Type 2, Class 2, zinc - coated (galvanized).
A. Round member sizes are given in actual outside diameter (OD) to the nearest thousandth of
inches. Round fence posts and rails are often referred to in ASTM standard specifications by
nominal pipe sizes (NPS) or the equivalent trade sizes in inches. The following indicates these
equivalents all measured in inches:
Actual OD NPS Size Trade Size
2.875 2 -1/2 3
3.500 3 3 -1/2
4.000 3 -1/2 4
6.625 6 6 -5/8
8.625 8 8 -5/8
B. Type I Round Posts: Standard weight (schedule 40) galvanized -steel pipe conforming to
ASTM F 1083, according to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group IA, with
minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi, not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating
inside and outside according to ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90, and weights per
foot as follows:
Actual OD Weight (1b /ft) NPS Size
2.875 5.79 2 -1/2
3.500 7.58 3
4.000 9.11 3 -1/2
6.625 8.97 6
8.625 28.55 8
C. Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths (17 to 21 feet) with swedged -end or expansion -type
coupling, approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching
top rail securely to each gate comer, pull, and end post.
1. Round Steel: 1.660 -inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
D. Steel posts for fabric heights up to 6 feet:
05/15/2012
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.875 -inch OD Type I steel pipe.
2. Round End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.875 -inch OD Type I steel pipe.
05/15/2012
E. Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double -gate
installation, according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts:
1. Steel posts for fabric height of 6 feet or less and gate leaf width:
a. Up to and Including 10 Feet: 2.875 -inch OD pipe weighing at least 4.64 lb. per ft.
2.3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill - finished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to suit
manufacturer's standards.
I. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise, hot -dip galvanize pressed steel or cast -iron
fence fittings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by
ASTM A 90.
2. Aluminum: Die cast conforming to ASTM B .26, aluminum -alloy 360 or sand cast
conforming to ASTM B 85, aluminum -alloy 365, ZG61A, or Tenzalloy.
B. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace. Use material specified below
for brace, and truss to line posts with 3/8- inch - diameter rod and adjustable tightener. Provide
manufacturer's standard galvanized - steel, cast -iron or cast - aluminum cap for each end.
1. Round Steel: 1.660 -inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
C. Bottom and Center Rail: Same material as top rail. Provide manufacturer's standard
galvanized - steel, cast -iron or cast - aluminum cap for each end,
D. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot -dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less than
the full height of fabric, a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimum of 1.2
oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each comer
and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into the post.
E. Tension and Brace Bands: 3/4- inch -wide minimum hot -dip galvanized steel with a minimum of
1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft.
1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum.
2. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick (12 gage) minimum.
F. Tension Wire: 0.177- inch - diameter metallic- coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to
ASTM A 824 with finish to match fabric.
1. Coating Type II zinc in the following class as determined by ASTM A 90. Class 2, with a
minimum coating weight of 1.20 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface.
G. Tie Wires: 0.106- inch - diameter (12 -gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.4 PRIVACY SLATS
A. Material: PVC, UV -light stabilized, not less than 0.023 inch (0.58 mm) thick; attached to not
less than 0.0475 -inch diameter, twisted galvanized wire; hedge -type lattice; sized to fit mesh
specified for direction indicated.
B. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 BARBED WIRE
05/15/2012
of zinc coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch- diameter (9 -gage) aluminum
wire alloy 1350 -H19 or equal, to match fabric wire.
A. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Manufacturer's standard barbed wire supporting arms
conforming to ASTM F 626, metal and finish to match fence framework, with provision for
anchorage to posts and attaching three rows of barbed wire to each arm. Supporting arms may be
either attached to posts or integral with post top weather cap and must be capable of withstanding
250-lb downward pull at outermost end. Provide following type:
B. Steel Barbed Wire: Two- strand, 0.099 - inch - diameter (12 -1 /2 -gage) steel wire with
0.080- inch - diameter (14- gage), four -point barbs spaced not more than 5 inches o.c.;
metallic - coated finish to match fabric.
2.6 CONCRETE
1. Single 45- degree arm for three strands of barbed wire, one for each post.
1. Galvanized Finish: Comply with ASTM A 121, chain link fence grade with Class 3
coating with not less than 0.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTM A 90.
A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per
ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day
compressive strength of 3000 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum
size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump.
B. Packaged Concrete Mix: Mix dry- packaged normal - weight concrete conforming to ASTM C
387 with clean water to obtain a 2- to 3 -inch slump.
2.7 GATES
A. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework.
Assemble gate frames by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper
gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members
maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edges with
tension bars and bands and to top and bottom of frame with tie wires.
2. Bracing: Install diagonal cross - bracing consisting of 5/16- inch - diameter adjustable- length
truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GA ES 323113 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3. Barbed Wire: Extend end members of gate frames 12 inches above top member and
prepare to receive three strands of wire. Provide necessary clips for securing wire to
extensions.
B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide:
05/15/2012
a. Up to 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.660 -inch minimum OD Type 1
or II steel pipe or 1 -1/2 -inch- square galvanized -steel tubing weighing 1.84 lb per sq.
ft.
2. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according to
the following:
a. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non -lift -off type, offset to permit
180- degree gate opening. Provide 1 -1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 -foot
nominal height.
b. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate,
with padlock eye as an integral part of latch.
c. Keeper: Provide a keeper for vehicle gates that automatically engages gate leaf and
holds it in the open position until manually released.
d. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of mushroom -type flush
plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or
plunger bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the
latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. A permanent
padlock shall be provided by Owner. A temporary padlock shall be provided by
Contractor to secure project site until acceptance.
A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection
before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted.
1. Apply fabric to outside of framework. Install fencing on boundary lines inside of property
line established by survey as required by Division 1.
B. Excavation: Drill or hand - excavate (using post -hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and
spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Provide 3 foot minimum embedment
for all posts.
1. If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum diameter
recommended by fence manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest cross section
of post.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post
bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Space a
maximum of 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts
and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and
hold in position during placement and finishing operations.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and
trowel to a crown to shed water.
D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and at
other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail.
Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer,
E. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.
Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two thirds fabric
height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper
tension.
F. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before stretching
fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. Pull wire taut, without
sags.. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120- inch - diameter (11 -gage) hog rings of same
material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c.
G. Fabric: Leave approximately 1 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage unless otherwise
indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side
of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains under tension after pulling force is
released.
H. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts
with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c.
I. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric fit nnily to posts and. rails. Bend ends of
wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches
o.c.
3. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the
fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts for added security.
K. Privacy Slats: Install slats in direction indicated, securely locked in place.
1. Diagonally, for privacy factor of 80 to 85.
L. Barbed Wire: Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or
terminal arms according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 GATE INSTALLATION
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
END OF SECTION 323113
05/15/2012
A. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground -set
items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where
necessary. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure.
A. Gates: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal
traffic, readjust gates for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate moving contact
areas and clean exposed surfaces.
A. Chain link fence and gate work as described in this section will be considered as incidental to the
construction of the various elements of the tank installation it is associated with, and no separate
payment will be made therefore.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Seeding.
2. Hydroseeding.
3. Sodding.
4. Erosion - control material(s).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
D. Planting Soil: Existing, on -site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified
with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
E. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.
05/15/2012
B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture,
stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and
percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of
packaging.
TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of
turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful
turf establishment.
2.1 SEED
1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and
name and telephone number of supplier.
1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the
Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
2. Experience: Three years' experience in turf installation.
3. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
05/15/2012
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication
of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.
13. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for
Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation
sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours
of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing
Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Seed Species:
1. Quality: State - certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure.
2. Full Sun: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon).
2.2 TURFGRASS SOD
A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's
"Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color,
and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when
planted.
B. Turfgrass Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon).
2.3 FERTILIZERS
05/15/2012
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of
fast- and slow - release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea
formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb /1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent
potassium, by weight.
2.4 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air -dry, clean, mildew- and seed -free, salt hay or threshed straw of
wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
2.5 EROSION- CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Erosion- Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut -fiber mat enclosed
in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6
inches long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
installation and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture
content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting
soil.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and
plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Install erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Drawings.
B. Placing Planting Soil: See Drawings.
1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION - CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.
B. For erosion - control blanket, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended
by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.
C. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to
dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
3.5 SEEDING (EROSION CONTROL & MAINTANENCE REPAIR FOR SOD ONLY)
A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity
exceeds 5 mph.
1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
B. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
C. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion - control blankets installed and
stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.
TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.6 HYDROSEEDING ( EROSION CONTROL & MAINTANENCE REPAIR FOR SOD ONLY)
A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, commercial fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using
equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly
blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.
1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.
2. Spray -apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one -step process. Apply slurry
at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-1b/acre dry weight,
and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed - sowing rate.
3.7 SODDING
3.8 TURF MAINTENANCE
05/15/2012
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting unless a suitable preservation method is accepted by
Owner prior to delivery time. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil
or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air
pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between
pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod
manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after
planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth
of 1 -1/2 inches below sod.
A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,
replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll,
regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf.
Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf - watering equipment to convey
Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified
height without cutting more than one -third of grass height. Remove no more than one -third of
grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades
bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent
mowings to maintain the following grass height:
1. Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch.
TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG - 88880003)
3.9 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
05/1 5/2012
1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand
of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage
exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.
2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well- rooted, even -
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of
vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove nondegradable erosion - control measures after grass establishment period.
3.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately
after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than
the following periods:
1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or
if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
2. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping joining materials.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Sleeves.
4. Identification devices.
5. Grout.
6. Flowable fill
7. Piped utility demolition.
8. Piping system common requirements.
9. Equipment installation common requirements.
10. Concrete bases.
11. Metal supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures
and weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
I. Identification devices.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
05/15/2012
A. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU - 0068(FG- 88880003)
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME BI8.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
05/15/2012
B. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.2 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller:
1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting.
C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
b. JCM Industries.
c. Smith - Blair, Inc.
d. Viking Johnson.
2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling for underground pressure piping.
D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Spears Manufacturing Co.
2. Description: PVC one -piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint or threaded
end.
E. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. NIBCO INC.
b. Spears Manufacturing Co.
2. Description: MSS SP -107, PVC four -part union. Include brass threaded end, solvent-
cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber 0-ring, and union nut.
F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. Fernco, Inc.
2. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be
joined, and corrosion - resistant metal band on each end.
2.3 SLEEVES
. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.4 IDEN'I IFICATION DEVICES
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 33 Sections. If
more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or
stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color - coded, pressure - sensitive, self - adhesive vinyl tape,
at least 3 mils thick.
1. Width: 1 -1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2 -1/2
inches for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32 -inch hole for fastener.
1. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic.
2. Size: 1 -1 /2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire -link or beaded chain; or brass S- hooks.
2.5 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic - cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.6 FLOWABLE FILL
A. Description: Low - strength - concrete, flowable- slurry mix.
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland.
2. Density: 115- to 145- lb /cu. ft..
3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine.
4. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly -ash mineral.
5. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
6. Strength: 100 to 200 psig at 28 days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION
05/15/2012
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable
fill, and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas
2 inches above finished floor level.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board
partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Plastic Piping Solvent- Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other - than - schedule - number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction
of flow.
1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for
hot noninsulated piping.
2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible
enclosures.
d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major
item of equipment.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two - thirds to three - fourths of size of
principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among
multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other
Divisions.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of base.
3. Install epoxy - coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive - strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete"
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
END OF SECTION 330500
05/15/2012
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 331223 — MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Hydraulic Institute Standards
C. American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM)
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
G. Anti- Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)
H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
I. National Electrical Code (NEC)
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
05/15/2012
1. Horizontal Split Case centrifugal pumps.
2. Motor Control Center
3. Variable Frequency Drives
4. Master Control Panel including PLC with programming, Operator Interface Display OID),
and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) components.
5. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT)
6. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
7. Field Testing, Start-up, and Training
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. 35100 - Water Supply Main
2. 260519 to 265600 - Electrical Specifications
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for
remote - control, signaling power - limited circuits.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include complete product and component data,
materials of construction, and dimensions.
B. Complete wiring and schematic diagrams.
C. Motor performance data as published by the motor manufacturer.
D. Certified pump performance test curves depicting actual pump performance plotted on an X -Y plot
for each prescribed condition point.
E. Pump bearing life calculations at rated condition points.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance. Data: Complete operations and maintenance manuals tailored to the
specific equipment provided.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
05/15/2012
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 845 for motor control centers.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate all project components, including mechanical, electrical and instrumentation items,
within scope of work as required to provide a complete functioning project.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
C. Coordinate all facets of general contract work inclusive of any work performed under allowances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, SPLIT CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ITT Goulds Model
3410 4x6 -15 horizontal split case pump assemblies as detailed in this specification in a tri-plex
operating configuration.
B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, in -line, single- stage, double suction, axial split case
centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted horizontal.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: The pump casing shall be double volute design of ASTM A48 cast iron with a
minimum thickness of 0.500" and a pressure rating of 175 PSIG. Casing shall be subjected
to a non - witnessed pump hydrostatic test at 150% of the maximum working pressure. Test
results shall be forwarded to the engineer and incorporated into the operations and
maintenance manual for the equipment. Suction connection shall be a flanged six (6) inch
port with a four (4) inch flanged discharge. Flanges shall be 125# ANSI flat face on both
suction and discharge. The pump feet shall also be cast as an integral part of the lower
casing. Bare pump weight shall not be less than 635 pounds.
2. Impeller: The impeller shall be of one piece cast ASTM B584 Alloy C876 silicon bronze,
double suction type. The impeller shall be balanced to ISO 1940/1 G2.5 at a minimum,
keyed to the shaft by a stainless steel key and fixed in axial position by shaft sleeves.
3. Casing Wear Ring: Bronze renewable casing rings shall be furnished. Wear rings shall be
held in position by two (2) stainless steel anti - rotation pins in the lower casing.
4. Impeller Wear Ring: Bronze renewable impeller wear rings shall be furnished. Impeller
rings shall be fixed to the impeller by axial stainless set screws.
5. Shaft: The shaft shall be ASTM A276 -91A Type 316 stainless steel, adequately sized for the
loads transmitted. Shaft deflection shall not exceed 0.002 Inches at the face of the stuffing
box when operating between 95% and 105% of capacity at best efficiency point at the
pump's maximum 60 Hz speed and with full diameter impeller.
6. Shaft Sleeve: The shaft shall be protected through the stuffing box by means of bronze shaft
sleeves. The sleeves shall be protected from shaft rotation by the stainless steel impeller key
and locked in place by sleeve nuts. The sleeves shall be sealed with o -rings and gaskets to
eliminate leakage between the shaft and sleeve.
7. Mechanical Seals: The pump shall be sealed with single split mechanical seals (Chesterton
model 442, or engineer pre - approved equal) with faces of carbon and ceramic, stainless steel
metallic components and Buna -N elastomers. Mechanical seal bypass tubing shall be
stainless steel with needle type valves and a stainless steel casing vent valve.
8. Bearings: Inboard bearings shall be single row, deep groove ball type; the inboard bearing
shall be arranged for radial loads only. The outboard bearing shall be arranged for both axial
and radial loads and shall be double row. Both bearings shall be grease lubricated with
grease flush through the bearing housing. Bearings shall be designed for an average life far
exceeding 100,000 hours. Bearing life calculations shall be provided to the engineer as part
of the equipment submittal package.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
9. Bearing Seals: Bearings shall be protected from liquid entry by means of Inpro VBX
labyrinth seals on both the inboard and outboard sides of the bearing housings.
10. Coupling: A flexible coupling shall be provided between the pump and driver. It shall be a
Falk gear type unit. A coupling guard shall be furnished over the coupling for protection.
11. Base Plate: The pump and driver shall be mounted on a common fabricated steel base. Pump
and driver shall be bolted in place prior to factory shipment. Final alignment must be
performed at the jobsite in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and the
installation, operation and maintenance instructions. Base is to be leveled and grouted to
eliminate vibration. Piping shall be fabricated to meet the pump flanges after initial field
alignment is completed. Prior to pump start-up a final alignment check shall be performed to
ensure no undue flange loads (pipe stress) are transferred to the pump
12. Performance Test: A non - witnessed factory performance test shall be performed on each
pump per the latest Hydraulic Institute standards. The test shall determine pump capacity,
head and efficiency.
D. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Default Operating Condition No. 1
a. Secondary Condition Point: 750 GPM
b. Secondary Condition Point Total Dynamic Head: 169 foot
c. Secondary Condition Point NPSHr = 5.9 Feet
d. Secondary Condition Point Pump Efficiency 78%
2. Exercise & Emergency Conditions No. 2A & 2B
a. Primary Condition Point Capacity: 1000 GPM.
b. Primary Condition Point Total Dynamic Head: 232 Feet.
c. Primary Condition Point NPSHr: 7.4 Feet.
d. Pump Primary Condition Point Efficiency: 79.0 %.
Ref. Paragraph 2.4.R.11 Sequence of Operations for addition information on pump operations.
3. Pump Speed: 1770 RPM (Sine Wave Power).
4. Motor Horsepower: 100 HP with 1.15 Service Factor (on Sine Wave Power)
5. Electrical Characteristics:
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION
05/15/2012
ondition_lir_.I Cu;
Flow/Pump (GPM)
500
750
1000
1500
Total Flow (GPM)
500
750
1000
1500
TDH (1r 1)
154
169
191
245 ,
Comment
Secondary Condition Pt.
Ref. Paragraph 2.4.R.11 for Sequence of Operations for addition information on pump operations.
331223 - 4
`CaittlI' b
e 13. „._ _ ._ .. _. , =
Flow/Pump (GPM)
Total Flow (GPM
TDH (FT)
Comment
500
1000
167
750
1500
195
1000
2000
232
Primary Condition Pt.
1250
2500
275
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
9. Bearing Seals: Bearings shall be protected from liquid entry by means of Inpro VBX
labyrinth seals on both the inboard and outboard sides of the bearing housings.
10. Coupling: A flexible coupling shall be provided between the pump and driver. It shall be a
Falk gear type unit. A coupling guard shall be furnished over the coupling for protection.
11. Base Plate: The pump and driver shall be mounted on a common fabricated steel base. Pump
and driver shall be bolted in place prior to factory shipment. Final alignment must be
performed at the jobsite in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and the
installation, operation and maintenance instructions. Base is to be leveled and grouted to
eliminate vibration. Piping shall be fabricated to meet the pump flanges after initial field
alignment is completed. Prior to pump start-up a final alignment check shall be performed to
ensure no undue flange loads (pipe stress) are transferred to the pump
12. Performance Test: A non - witnessed factory performance test shall be performed on each
pump per the latest Hydraulic Institute standards. The test shall determine pump capacity,
head and efficiency.
D. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Default Operating Condition No. 1
a. Secondary Condition Point: 750 GPM
b. Secondary Condition Point Total Dynamic Head: 169 foot
c. Secondary Condition Point NPSHr = 5.9 Feet
d. Secondary Condition Point Pump Efficiency 78%
2. Exercise & Emergency Conditions No. 2A & 2B
a. Primary Condition Point Capacity: 1000 GPM.
b. Primary Condition Point Total Dynamic Head: 232 Feet.
c. Primary Condition Point NPSHr: 7.4 Feet.
d. Pump Primary Condition Point Efficiency: 79.0 %.
Ref. Paragraph 2.4.R.11 Sequence of Operations for addition information on pump operations.
3. Pump Speed: 1770 RPM (Sine Wave Power).
4. Motor Horsepower: 100 HP with 1.15 Service Factor (on Sine Wave Power)
5. Electrical Characteristics:
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION
05/15/2012
ondition_lir_.I Cu;
Flow/Pump (GPM)
500
750
1000
1500
Total Flow (GPM)
500
750
1000
1500
TDH (1r 1)
154
169
191
245 ,
Comment
Secondary Condition Pt.
Ref. Paragraph 2.4.R.11 for Sequence of Operations for addition information on pump operations.
331223 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. Pump Accessories:
2.2 MOTORS
a. Volts; 460.
b. Phases: Three (3).
c. Hertz: 60 (Sine Wave).
d. Full -Load Amperes: 112.
05/15/2012
1. Provide an air release valve with isolation ball valve on each pump casing and a drain line
from the air release valve to the nearest floor drain adjacent to each pump pad. Refer to
Water Supply Main Specification 335100 for air release valve specification and plans for
installation detail.
2. Provide base plate drain piping from the 3/4" NPT connection on the pump end of the base
plate to the nearest floor drain adjacent to each pump pad.
A. Motor: Electric motor shall be a premium efficiency rated (as designated by current NEMA
standards) unit rated for operation via a variable frequency drive (10:1 variable torque) with Open
Drip -Proof (ODP) enclosure. Motor manufacturer shall be an active member of NEMA. Motors
shall be a product of Nidec (USEM) or engineer pre - approved equal. Motor manufacturer shall have
experience in the design and manufacture of similar products for a minimum of 10 years. Buy -outs
or private labeled motors are not acceptable.
1. Service Conditions:
a. Suitable for service indoors in a clean environment.
b. Ambient temperature not greater than 40 degrees C.
. c. Voltage variation of +/- 10%
d. Frequency variation of +1- 5%
e. Combination of C.3 and C.4 above, not to exceed 10%
2. Motors shall be NEMA frame horizontal units rated 100 horsepower, 1800 RPM (four pole)
with Open Drip -Proof (ODP) enclosure and 1.15 service factor at sine wave power.
3. Unless otherwise specified, power supply shall be 460/3/60 (for nominal 480 volt system).
4. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall have three leads terminating in the main motor con-
duit box. Paralleled leads are acceptable above 200 HP.
5. Insulation shall be rated minimum Class F (155 degrees C.)
a. Magnet wire shall be copper and rated Class F (155 degrees C.) spike resistant wire.
b. Magnet wire shall be classified Pulse Endurance, suitable for variable frequency appli-
cations.
c. Varnish shall be 100% solids polyester. Water borne varnish is not acceptable. Motor
stators shall be double dipped and baked
6. Rotor bar construction shall be cast aluminum.
7. Maximum temperature rise at rated HP shall not exceed Class B limits (80 degrees C) on
sine wave power.
8. Maximum temperature rise at 1.15 Service Factor shall not exceed Class F limits (155 de-
grees C.)
9. Motors shall be premium efficiency in accordance with "NEMA PREMIUM" rm values for
horsepower, speed and enclosure.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
10. Motors shall adhere to NEMA MG -1 Part 31 and shall be name - plated accordingly.
11. The driven machine shall not overload the motor rating at any operating point.
12. Bearings:
a. Bearings shall be rated for a 5 -year minimum L -10 life at operating condition.
b. Bearings shall be anti friction type, ball or roller as required.
c. Drive End (DE) Bearing shall be protected by a labyrinth seal combined with a current
diverter ring as noted below or a lip seal and shaft grounding ring as noted below.
d. The Opposite Drive End (ODE) bearing shall be insulated.
13. Shaft Grounding shall be installed in the motor drive end DE) and incorporated into the DE
bearing isolator. Shaft grounding shall be Inpro CDR , AEGIS" 841 SGR or equal.
14. Lubrication:
2.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
a. Grease lubricated bearings shall be designed for electric motor use. Grease shall be
capable of higher temperatures associated with electric motors and shall be equal to
Dow Molykote ® 44 High Temperature Grease or equal.
b. Grease fittings shall be Alernite M type, no smaller than 1 /4" NPT.
c. Grease exits shall be automatic pressure relief type, no smaller than %4" NPT.
15. Vibration shall not exceed 0.08 inches per second, peak to peak.
16. Noise level shall not exceed 85 db (A) at 1 meter, no load, free field.
17. Motors shall have permanent lifting eyes or lugs capable of a safety factor of five (5).
18. All external fasteners shall be hexagon -head, cadmium or zinc plated class 5 or better. Slot-
ted head, Phillips head and socket head fasteners are acceptable only for use internally and
not exposed to the external environment. Metric fasteners are not acceptable.
19. Anti condensation heaters shall be provided to keep motor windings at least 10 degrees F.
above ambient temperature. Heaters shall be 1/60/115 with leads terminating in a separate
auxiliary outlet box or condulet.
20. Winding thermostats shall be in each phase of the motor. There shall be one per phase, NC,
connected in series with leads terminating in the auxiliary outlet box.
21. Grounding provisions shall be in the main terminal box.
A. Description: The low voltage motor control center (MCC) shall include the three (3) variable
frequency drives (VFD) to operate the booster pumps. The pump assembly provider shall have sole
source responsibility for the pump and associated controls including the MCC, VFDs and the
Master Control Panel (MCP). The MCC shall be 480 V, 3- Phase, 3 -Wire, 60 Hz. The MCC must
conform to Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 845 and the National Electrical Code (NEC). The
MCC must be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility and shall be a product of Square D
(Schneider Electric) as basis of design. The MCC shall consist of vertical sections containing a
main circuit breaker disconnect, surge protection device (SPD), 45KVA transformer, 125A 3 phase
120/208V panelboard and three (3)100 HP rated variable frequency drives. MCC enclosure shall
be rated NEMA 1 (Gasketed).
13. Section Materials of Construction: Sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel bolted
together to form a rigid, free - standing assembly. A removable seven (7) gauge structural steel
lifting angle shall be mounted full width if the MCC shipping blocks at the top. Removable seven
(7) gauge bottom channel sills shall be mounted underneath front and rear of the vertical sections
and extend the full length of the shipping blocks. Internal reinforcement structural parts shall be
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
constructed of twelve (12) and fourteen (14) gauge steel to provide a strong, rigid assembly. The
entire assembly shall be constructed and packaged to withstand normal stresses including transit
and installation.
C. Finish: All steel components shall be protected with UL listed acrylic /alkyd enamel paint finish or
triglycidyl isocyanurate (TGIC) power coat with the exception of plated components used for
ground connections. All painted parts shall undergo a multi -stage treatment process followed by
the finish coat paint application.
1. Pre- treatment shall include at a minimum:
a. Hot alkaline cleaner to remove grease and oil.
b. Iron phosphate treatment to improve adhesion and corrosion resistance.
2. Paint shall be applied using an electro- deposition process to ensure a uniform paint coating
with high adhesion.
3. Paint finish shall be tested to UL50 per ASTM B117 (5% ASTM Salt Spray) with no greater
than 0.125 inches (3mm) loss of paint from a scribed line.
4. Paint color shall be 449 medium gray per ANSI Standard Z55.1 -967 (60 -70 gloss) on all
surfaces unless otherwise specified. Control Station plates and escutcheon plates shall be
painted a contrasting gray. All interior saddles shall be painted white for better visibility
inside the unit.
D. Structures: Structures shall be totally enclosed, dead -front, free-standing assemblies. Structures
shall be capable of being bolted together to form a single assembly and have the following features:
1. The overall height of the MCC shall not exceed ninety (90) inch (2286 nun) (not including
base channel or lifting angle). Base channels of one and one -half (1.5) inch (38 mm) height,
and lifting angles of three (3) inch (76 mrn) height, shall be removable. The total width of
one section shall be twenty (20) inches(508 mm), twenty -five (25) inches (635 mm) or thirty
(30) inches (762 mm).
2. Structures shall be NEMA IA (gasketed general purpose) rated.
3. Each twenty (20) inch (508 mm) wide standard section shall have all the necessary hardware
and bussing for modular plug -on units to be added and moved around. All unused space shall
be covered by hinged blank doors or appropriate cover plate and equipped to accept future
units. Vertical bus openings shall be covered by manual bus shutters.
4. Each section shall include a top plate (single piece or two - piece). Top and bottom plates
shall be removable for ease in cutting conduit entry openings.
E. Wireways: Structures shall contain a minimum twelve (12) inch (305 mm) high horizontal
wireway at the top of each section and a minimum six (6) inch (152 mm) high horizontal wireway
at the bottom of each section. These wireways shall run the full length of the MCC to allow room
for power and control cable to connect between units in different sections. A full -depth vertical
wireway shall be provided in each MCC section that accepts modular plug -on units. The vertical
wireway shall connect with both the top and bottom horizontal wireway. The vertical wireway shall
be four (4) inches (102 mm) wide minimum with a separate hinged door. There should be a
minimum of eighty (80) in. (516 cm of cabling space available for the twenty (20) inch -deep
sections. Access to the wireways shall not require opening control unit doors. Structures that house
a single, full section control unit are not required to have vertical wireways. Those control units
must open directly into the MCC horizontal wireways.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
F. Barriers: All power bussing and splice connections shall be isolated from the unit compartments
and the wireways. The horizontal bus shall be mounted onto a glass filled polyester support
assembly that braces the bus against the forces generated during a short circuit. The horizontal bus
shall be isolated from the top horizontal wireway by a two -piece rigid non- conductive barrier. The
barrier design shall allow qualified personnel to slide the barriers both left and right, to allow access
to the bus and connections for maintenance without having to remove the barrier. Barrier sliding
shall occur via an upper and lower track system.
The vertical bus shall be housed in a molded glass - filled polyester support that provides bus
insulation and braces the bus against the forces generated during a short circuit. These supports
shall have openings every 3 in (75 mm) for unit stab -on connections. Each opening shall be
provided with a manual shutter to close off the stab opening. These shutters shall be attached to the
structure so that when they are removed (to allow a stab connection) they are retained in the
structure and are readily accessible for use should a plug -in unit be removed from the MCC.
Barriers shall be provided in the vertical structure and unit designs to prevent the contact of any
energized bus or terminal by a fish tape inserted through the conduit or wireway areas.
G. Bussing: All bussing and connectors shall be tin - plated copper.
The main horizontal bus shall be rated at 600 A continuous and shall extend the full length of the
MCC. Bus ratings shall be based on 65° C maximum temperature rise in a 40° C ambient.
Provisions shall be provided for splicing additional sections onto either end of the MCC.
The horizontal bus splice bars shall be pre - assembled into a captive bus stack. This bus stack is
installed into the end of the MCC power bus to allow the installation of additional sections. The
main bus splice shall utilize four bolts, two on each side of the bus split, for each phase. Additional
bolts must not required when splicing higher amperage bus. The splice bolts shall secure to self
clenching nuts installed in the bus assembly. It shall be possible to maintain any bus connection
with a single tool.
Each section that accepts plug -in units shall be provided with a vertical bus for distributing power
from the main bus to the individual plug -in units. This bus shall be of tin plated copper and shall be
rated at 300 A continuous. The vertical bus shall be connected directly to the horizontal bus stack
without the use of risers or other intervening connectors. It shall be possible to maintain the vertical
to horizontal bus connection with a single tool, • "Nut and bolt" bus connections to the power bus
shall not be permitted.
A tin- plated copper ground bus shall be provided that runs the entire length of the MCC. The
ground bus shall be a 1/4 (0.25) inch (6.0 mm) x one (1.0) inch (25 mm) and be rated for 300 A. A
compression lug shall be provided in the MCC for a 4/0 -250 kcmil ground cable. The ground bus
shall be provided with six (6) 3/8 (0.38) inch (10 mm) holes for each vertical section to accept
customer - supplied ground lugs for any loads requiring a ground conductor.
Each vertical section shall have a tin plated copper vertical ground bus that is connected to the
horizontal ground bus. This vertical ground bus shall be installed so that the plug -in units engage
the ground bus prior to engagement of the power stabs and shall disengage only after the power
stabs are disconnected upon removal of the plug -in unit.
The system shall be rated for an available short circuit capacity of 65,000 rms amperes.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
H. Construction: The MCC shall have the following construction features:
05/15/2012
1. Main Disconnect shall be connected directly to the main horizontal bus with appropriately
sized cable or riser bus.
2. All conducting parts on the line side of the unit disconnect shall be shrouded by a suitable
insulating material to prevent accidental contact with those parts.
3. Unit mounting shelves shall include hanger brackets to *support the unit weight during
installation and removal. All plug -on units shall use a twin - handle camming lever located at
the top of the bucket to rack in and out the plug -on unit. The cam lever shall work in
conjunction with the hanger brackets to ensure positive stab alignment.
4. A lever handle operator must be provided on each disconnect. With the unit stabs engaged
onto the vertical phase bus and the unit door closed, the handle mechanism shall allow
complete ON /OFF control of the unit. All circuit breaker operators shall include a separate
TRIPPED position to clearly indicate a circuit breaker trip condition. It shall be possible to
reset a tripped circuit breaker without opening the control unit door. Clear indication of
disconnect status shall be provided, by adhering to the following operator handle positions:
a. Handle "On" position must be up or to the left and within 45 degrees of being parallel
to the face of the equipment.
b. Handle "Off" position must be down or to the right and within 45 degrees of being
parallel to the face of the equipment. •
c. The minimum separation between the "On" and "Off' positions shall be 90 degrees.
d. Handle "Tripped" position must be perpendicular to the face of the equipment +1- 30
degrees. Minimum separation between "On" and "Tripped" shall be 30 degrees.
Minimum separation between "Tripped" and "Off' shall be 45 degrees.
5. A mechanical interlock shall prevent the operator from' opening the unit door when the
disconnect is in the ON position. Another mechanical interlock shall prevent the operator
from placing the disconnect in the ON position while the unit door is open. It shall be
possible for authorized personnel to defeat these interlocks.
6. A non- defeatable interlock shall be provided to prevent installing or removing a plug -on unit
unless the disconnect is in the OFF position.
7. The plug -in unit shall have a grounded stab -on connector which engages the vertical ground
bus prior to, and releases after, the power bus stab -on connectors.
8. Provisions shall be provided for locking all disconnects in the OFF position with up to three
padlocks.
9. Handle mechanisms shall be located on the left side to encourage operators to stand to the
left of the unit being switched.
10. Unit construction shall combine with the vertical wireway isolation barrier to provide a fully
compartmentalized design.
11. Unit interior surfaces (back, side and bottom plates) shall be painted white.
Circuit Monitor: The MCC shall have a circuit monitor capable of monitoring and recording
oscillatory and impulsive transients. Circuit monitor shall incorporate the following features:
1. Measure values: The circuit monitor shall record and save the minimum and maximum value
of all listed parameters since last reset. The circuit monitor shall also record and save the
interval minimum, maximum and average of any pre - selected values pre - defined over a user
specified interval. The following metered values shall be measured and recorded in
nonvolatile memory:
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Real Time Readings:
i. Current (Per - Phase, Neutral, Ground, 3 -Phase Average, Apparent RMS and
% Unbalanced).
ii. Voltage (Line -Line Per - Phase, Line -Line 3 -Phase Average, Line - Neutral Per -
Phase, 3 -Phase Average, Neutral to Ground, % Unbalanced).
iii. Real Power (Per - Phase, 3 -Phase Total).
iv. Reactive Power (Per -Phase, 3 -Phase Total).
v. Apparent Power (Per - Phase, 3 -Phase Total).
vi. Power Factor (True)(Per -Phase, 3 -Phase Total).
vii. Power Factor (Displacement)(Per -Phase, 3 -Phase Total).
viii. Frequency.
ix. Temperature (Internal Ambient).
x. THD (Current and Voltage).
xi. K- Factor (Per - Phase)
b. Energy Readings:
i. Accumulated Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVARh, Apparent kVAh)
(Signed/Absolute).
ii. Incremental Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVARh, Apparent kVAh)
(Signed /Absolute).
iii. Conditional Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVARh, Apparent kVAh)
(Signed/Absolute).
iv. Reactive Energy by Quadrant.
0. Demand Readings:
i. Demand Current (Per-Phase Present, 3 -Phase Average, Neutral); Last
complete interval and Peak.
ii. Demand Voltage (L -N, L -L, Per - Phase, 3 -Phase Average); Last complete
interval, Minimum and Peak.
iii. Average Power Factor (True) (3 -Phase Total); Last. complete interval,
Coincident with kW Peak, kVAR Peak, kVA Peak.
iv. Demand Real Power (3 -Phase Total); Last complete interval, Predicted,
Peak, Coincident with kVA Demand or kVAR Demand.
v. Demand Reactive Power (3 -Phase Total); Last complete interval, Predicted,
Peak, Coincident kVA Demand or kW Demand.
vi. Demand Apparent Power (3 -Phase Total); Last complete interval, Predicted,
Peak, Coincident kVA Demand or kW Demand.
d. Power Analysis Values
i. THD — Voltage, Current (3- Phase, Per - Phase, Neutral).
ii. Thd - Voltage, Current (3 -Phase, Per - Phase, Neutral).
iii. Total Demand Distortion.
iv. K- Factor (Per- Phase).
v. Crest Factor (Per - Phase).
vi. Displacement Power Factor (Per - Phase, 3- Phase).
vii. Fundamental Voltage, Magnitude and Angle (Per- Phase).
05/15/2012
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
viii. Fundamental Currents, Magnitude and Angle (Per - Phase).
ix. Fundamental Real Power (Per - Phase, 3- Phase).
x. Fundamental Reactive Power (Per - Phase).
xi. Harmonic Power ((Per- Phase, 3- Phase).
xii. Phase Rotation.
xiii. Unbalance (Current and Voltage).
xiv. Harmonic Magnitudes & Angles (Per - Phase).
xv. Distortion Power.
xvi. Distortion Power Factor.
05/15/2012
2. The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide
true RMS accuracy to the 255 harmonic (based on fundamental of 60 Hz).
3. The following metered values as well as the minimum and maximum instantaneous readings
since last reset shall be communicated by the Circuit Monitor:
a. Frequency.
b. Temperature.
c. Current, Per Phase RMS and Neutral (if applicable).
d. Current, 3 -Phase Average RMS.
e. Current, Apparent RMS.
f. Voltage, Phase -to -Phase and Phase -to- Neutral.
g. Voltage Unbalance, Phase -to -Phase and Phase -to- Neutral.
h. Power Factor, Per Phase.
i. Power Factor, 3 -Phase Total.
j. Real Power, Per Phase and 3 -Phase Total.
k. Reactive Power, Per Phase and 3 -Phase Total.
1. Apparent Power, Per Phase and 3 -Phase Total.
m. Demand Current, Per Phase and Three -Phase Average.
n. Demand Real Power, Three -Phase Average.
o. Demand Reactive Power, Three -Phase Average.
p. Demand Apparent Power, Three -Phase Average.
q. Accumulated Energy, (MWh, MVAH, and MVARh).
r. Reactive Energy, (VARh by quadrant).
s. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Voltage and Current, Per Phase.
t. K- Factor, Per Phase.
4. Demand: All power demand calculations shall be done by one of the following user
selectable calculation methods:
a. Thermal demand is calculated using a sliding window and is updated every second.
The sliding window length shall be defined by the user from 1 -60 minutes, with 1-
minute increments.
b. Block interval, with optional sub - intervals. The window length shall be set by the user
from 1 -60 minutes in 1- minute intervals. The user shall be able to set the sub - interval
length from 1 -30 minutes in 1- minute intervals.
c. External Pulse Synchronization, utilizing a synch pulse provided externally. An
optional status input shall be used to sense the pulse.
d. Sliding block interval with continuous sliding 1 second subintervals.
e. The default demand calculation method shall be a fifteen (15) minute continuous
sliding block.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 11
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
5. The following demand readings shall be reported by the Circuit Monitor:
a. Average Demand Current, Per Phase.
b. Peak Demand Current, Per Phase.
c. Average demand for Real Power, Reactive Power, and Apparent Power.
d. Predicted demand for Real Power, Reactive Power, and Apparent Power.
e. Peak demand for Real Power, Reactive Power, and Apparent Power.
05/15/2012
6. The circuit monitor shall contain mo less than 8 MB of on -board nonvolatile memory.
7. The circuit monitor shall be a PowerLogic CM4000T as manufactured by Square D or an
engineer pre - approved equal.
J. Main Circuit Breaker/Disconnect: Over current protection for the MCC to be a 600 A, 3 pole,
480V circuit breaker
K. Dry Transformer: The single phase loads served by the MCC shall be powered by a UL listed dry
type transformer. Transformer shall be a product of the MCC manufacturer and shall be rated for a
150° C rise above 40 C ambient. Transformer shall be a low loss with a minimum efficiency
conforming to NEMA TP 1. Transformer coils shall be of continuous wound construction
impregnated with non- hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Transformer sound level shall not
exceed 45 dB. Transformer shall have a 45 KVA rating with 208/120V/1/60 secondary.
Transformer shall be protected by a primary side circuit breaker with a 65 KAIC rating.
L. Power Panel: MCC mounted power panel shall be a product of the MCC manufacturer. Panel shall
be rated for 225A and protected by a circuit breaker with a 65 KAIC rating. Panel shall have a
minimurn of forty -two (42) circuits and include both single and two (2) pole circuit breakers for all
building single phase loads.
M. Surge Protection Device (SPD): The MCC shall be equipped with an integral Transient Voltage
Surge Suppressor (TVSS) or Surge Protection Device (SPD). The TVSS shall be a product of the
MCC manufacturer and UL listed. Minimum rating shall be 160kA per phase. Construction shall
be one (1) self - contained suppression module per phase with indicator lights for positive indication
of phase /module operability. TVSS shall be equipped with an audible alarm to indicate surge
module end -of -life condition and be fitted with dry contacts to allow for remote indication.
2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Description: The low voltage motor control center (MCC) shall include the three (3) variable
frequency drives (VFD) to operate the booster pumps. These VFDs shall be Square D (Schneider
Electric) model Altivar 61 as basis of design. VFDs shall be 480 V, 3- Phase, 3 -Wire.
B. The AC drive controller unit shall be a combination disconnect -drive MCC style unit. The input
circuit breaker shall provide NEC required branch circuit protection. The branch circuit protection
shall have an external operator. The variable frequency drives shall be variable torque rated. Wiring
between the AC drive and the disconnect shall not be disturbed when removing or installing the AC
drive controller unit from the MCC.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 12
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
C. Units should be of modular construction so that it is possible to readily interchange units of the
same size without modifications to the MCC structure.
D. All conducting parts on the line side of the unit disconnect shall be isolated to prevent accidental
contact with those parts.
E. Variable frequency drive units shall be connected directly to the main horizontal bus with
appropriately sized cable or riser bus.
F. All AC drive controller unit interior mounting panels shall be white for better visibility.
G. A disconnect operator shall be provided per this specification.
H. All AC drive controller units shall be provided with unit control terminal blocks for use in
terminating field wiring. Terminal blocks shall be pull -apart type, 250 V, and rated for 10 A. All
current- carrying parts shall be tin - plated. Terminals shall be accessible from inside the unit when
the unit door is opened. The stationary portion of the terminal block shall be used for factory
connections and will remain attached to the unit when the portion used for field connections is
removed. The terminals used for field connections shall be accessible so they can be wired without
removing the unit or any of its components.
1. The variable frequency drive unit shall incorporate a self - contained, air -based cooling system. Any
air exhaust vents shall be louvered to help direct air flow away from personnel operating the unit.
Any fans, ductwork, or filters shall be easily accessible for maintenance.
J. The VFD unit cooling system shall be sized to cool the drive regardless of mounting location within
the MCC. The AC drive controller unit shall not be restricted to a specific location in the MCC.
K. An internal overtemperature trip shall be provided to detect cooling system failure or blockage.
Upon occurrence of an overtemperature trip, the cooling system fans shall continue funning to
provide a rapid cool down.
L. Power for the cooling system shall be provided internal to the VFD unit by use of a control power
transformer that includes two primary fuses and one secondary fuse (in the non - ground secondary
conductor).
M. The AC drive controller unit shall be designed to operate from an input voltage of 480 VAV, + or -
10%.
N. Electrical Ratings
1. The VFD shall operate from an input voltage frequency range of 57 -63 Hz.
2. The displacement power factor shall not be less than 0.95 lagging under any speed or load
condition.
3. The efficiency of the VFD at 100% speed and load shall not be less than 96 %.
4. The variable torque overtorque capacity shall be 130% for 1 minute.
5. The output carrier frequency of the AC drive shall be selectable between 1 kHz and 16 kHz,
depending on inverter rating for low noise operation. The output carrier frequency of the AC
drive shall be randomly modulated to avoid resonance.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 13
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
O. Protection
P. Adjustment and Configuration
05/15/2012
6. All VFD feeder equipment, including conductors, lugs, disconnects, contactors, etc., shall be
sized per NEC Article 430 for the drive input current rating. An impedance range
corresponding to a 22,000 to 100,000 A fault availability level shall be assumed for the input
current rating.
1. The AC drive controller unit shall be protected against fault currents up to and including
100,000 A RMS symmetrical at 480 VAC and shall be UL 845 listed as verification.
2. Upon power -up, the VFD shall automatically test for valid operation of memory, option
module, loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, dynamic brake failure, DC to
DC power supply, control power, and the pre - charge circuit.
3. The VFD shall be protected against short circuits between output phases, between output
phases and ground, on the internal power supplies, and on the logic and analog outputs.
4. The AC shall have a minimum AC undervoltage power loss ride - through of 200 milliseconds
(12 cycles). The VFD shall have the user - defined option of frequency fold -back to increase
the duration of the power -loss ride - through.
5. The VFD will have a selectable ride - through function which will allow the logic to maintain
control for a minimum of one second (60 cycles) without faulting.
6. For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit, or internal fault, an auto restart
function shall provide restart attempts for a period of 5 minutes and up to an unlimited
amount time depending on setting. The restart attempts shall be separated by increasingly
longer waiting periods to allow the condition to be cleared.
7. The deceleration mode of the VFD shall be programmable. The stop modes shall include
free -wheel stop, ramp stop, fast stop, and DC injection braking.
8. Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the VFD shall be programmable
to fault and freewheel stop, ramp stop, fast stop, stop without trip, automatically restart, run
at last speed, or maintain a user - defined low speed setting.
9. The VFD shall have solid -state I that is UL Listed, meets UL 508C as a Class 10;
overload protection, and meets IEC 60947. The minimum adjustment range shall be from 25
to 150% of the nominal current rating of the VFD.
10. The VFD shall have three skip frequency ranges with hysteresis adjustment that can each be
programmed independently, back -to -back, or overlapping.
11. The VFD shall be include an adjustable thermal alarm which can be assigned to a relay or
logic output to indicate the drive temperature has reached the thermal alarm setting.
1. The variable frequency drive shall have a user selectable Auto Tune feature. The Auto Tune
will automatically send motor -rated current to the connected motor and store the resulting
resistance data into memory. The VFD will automatically optimize the operating
characteristics according to the stored data.
2. The VFD motor and control parameters will be factory preset to operate most common
applications. Necessary adjustments for factory supplied unit operator controls and
sequencing shall be pre - programmed and tested by the manufacturer.
3. A choice of three types of acceleration and deceleration ramps will be available in the AC
drive software — linear, S curve and U curve —as well as custom.
4. The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from 0.01 to 6000 seconds.
5. The volts per frequency ratios shall be user selectable to meet variable torque loads, normal,
and high torque machine applications.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 14
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
Q.
05/15/2012
6. The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the past eight faults for
operator review.
7. The software shall have an energy saving function that will optimize the energy consumed.
A constant volts /Hz ratio will be maintained during acceleration. The output voltage will
then automatically adjust to meet the torque requirement of the load.
8. Slip compensations shall be a software - enabled function.
9. The VFD shall offer programmable DC injection braking that will brake the AC motor by
injecting DC current and creating a stationary magnetic pole in the stator. The level of
current will be adjustable between 10 -110% of rated current and available from 0.1 -30
seconds continuously. For continuous operation after 30 seconds, the current shall be
automatically reduced to 50% of the nameplate current of the motor.
10. Sequencing logic will coordinate the engage and release thresholds and time delays for the
sequencing of the AC drive output, mechanical actuation, and DC injection braking in order
to accomplish smooth starting and stopping of a mechanical process.
Graphic Display Terminal Interface
1. The graphic display terminal shall provide 8 lines of 240 by 160 pixels in plain English to
control, adjust, and configure the AC drive including all electrical values, bar charts,
configuration parameters, I/O assignment, application and activity function access, faults,
local control, adjustment storage, self -test, and diagnostics. There will be a standard selection
of six additional languages built in to the operating software as standard.
2. The VFD .model number, torque type, software revision number, horsepower, output current,
motor frequency, and motor voltage shall all be listed on the drive identification display as
viewed on the graphic display terminal.
3. The graphic display shall be able to indicate one, two, or five digital values, or up to two
values by bar graph. As a minimum, the selectable display values shall consist of speed
reference, output frequency, output current, motor torque, output power, output voltage, line
voltage, DC voltage, motor thermal state, drive thermal state, elapsed time, motor speed,
machine speed reference, and machine speed.
4. The graphic display terminal will consist of programmable function keys. The functions will
allow both operating commands and programming options to be preset by the operator.
5. The graphic display terminal shall offer levels of settings from simple start-up to advanced
user menus consisting of parameter setting, I/O map, fault history, and drive configuration.
Password protection shall be available to limit unauthorized access to various levels of the
menus.
6. The navigation wheel shall provide the ability to scroll through menus and screens, select or
activate functions, or increase the value of a selected parameter.
7. An escape key shall allow a parameter to return the existing value if adjustment is not
required and the value is displayed. The escape function will also return to a previous menu
display.
8. A RUN key and a STOP key shall command normal starting and stopping as programmed
when the AC drive is in keypad control mode. The STOP key shall be active in all control
modes.
9. The keypad shall store up to four user configuration programs in nonvolatile memory. An
operator shall have the ability to download a stored configuration to multiple AC drives.
10. The operator interface shall be MCC door - mounted on the AC drive controller unit for ease
of access and increased visibility.
11. All door - mounted controls shall be NEMA 12 rated.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 15
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
R. Control
05/15/2012
I. Pilot devices shall be industrial rated 22mm type control operators and used independently of
the keypad display. Software assignments for control inputs and outputs to operate factory -
supplied controls shall be pre - configured from the factory. The following basic controls shall
be provided:
a. HAND- OFF -AUTO selector switch - The H -O -A selector switch shall allow for local
manual operation of the VFD as follows:
i. The HAND mode shall allow manual operation of start, stop, and speed
control. The VFD shall start when the control operation is in the HAND
mode. A door - mounted, manual -speed potentiometer shall be used to control
speed in the HAND mode. The VFD shall run at the low speed setting or
higher as required by the position of the manual -speed potentiometer. This
mode shall function as 2 -wire control and automatically restart after a power
outage or auto restart after a fault.
ii. The OFF position of the control operation shall stop the VFD and prevent it
from restarting.
iii. The AUTO (automatic) mode shall receive an auto start contact or serial link
command to control starting and stopping of the drive. Speed control shall be
from an external 4 -20 mA DC signal.
iv. Handle "On" position must be up or to the left and within 45 degrees of being
parallel to the face of the equipment.
v. Handle "Off' position must be down or to the right and within 45 degrees of
being parallel to the face of the equipment.
b. START -STOP pushbuttons - START /STOP _ pushbuttons shall provide 3 -wire
start/stop control.
c. "POWER ON" pilot light shall be red in color and shall have "push -to -test feature.
d. "FAULT" pilot light shall be yellow in color and shall have "push -to -test feature.
e. "RUN" pilot light shall be green in color and shall have "push -to -test feature.
f. "STOPPED" pilot light shall be red in color and shall have "push -to -test feature.
g. "HAND /AUTO" pilot lights shall be yellow in color and shall have "push -to -test
feature.
h. "MOTOR HEATER ENERGIZED" pilot light shall be red in color and shall have
"push -to -test feature.
2. 2 -wire or 3 -wire control strategy shall be defined within the software.
3. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24 VDC.
4. The internal power supply incorporates an automatic current fold -back that protects the
internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The transistor logic outputs shall
be current limited and not be damaged if shorted or if excess current is pulled.
5. All logic connections shall be furnished on pull -apart terminal strips.
6. Two (2) software assignable analog inputs with interference filtering shall be provided. The
analog inputs will be software selectable and consisting of user defined configurations: x -y
mAorx -yV.
7. Five (5) software assignable logic inputs shall be selected and assigned in the software. The
selection of assignments shall be selected from
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 16
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Forward
b. Reverse
c. Jog
d. Plus/minus speed (2 inputs required)
e. Setpoint memory
f. Preset speeds (up to 8 inputs)
g. Auto /manual control
h. Controlled stop
i. Terminal or keypad control
J. Output contactor (2 inputs required)
k. Motor switching
1. Fault reset.
8. There will be two software assignable analog outputs with interference filtering. The analog
outputs can be selected and assigned in the software. The analog output assignments shall be
proportional to the following motor characteristics:
a. Frequency
b. Current
c. Power
d. Torque
e. Voltage
f. Thermal state
The output signal will be user - defined configurations: x-y mA or x -y V.
05/15/2012
9. Two (2) voltage -free Form C relay output contacts shall be provided. One of the contacts
will indicate AC drive fault status. The other contact will be. user assignable.
10. Variable Frequency Drives shall include network communication interface for control and
data acquisition over Ethernet (Modbus TCP). Communication shall be between the
individual drive and the Master Control Panel (MCP).
a. Drives shall allow configuration of the following parameters at a minimum:
i. Motor Frequency
ii. Motor Voltage
iii. Ramp Profiles
iv. I/O Assignments
v. Current Limitation
b. Drives shall be capable of making the following adjustments:
i. Speed Range
ii. Ramp Time
iii. Thermal Protection
c. Drives shall allow control of these parameters:
i. Start/Stop
ii. Frequency Reference
iii. Fault Reset
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223. - 17
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
S. Harmonic Provisions
05/15/2012
1. A harmonic distortion analysis shall be completed by the MCC /variable frequency drive
manufacturer based upon system documentation provided by the installing contractor
including the following:
a. One -Line Diagrams
b. Distribution Transformer Information (kVA, %Z, and X/R ratio)
c. Emergency Standby Generator Performance Specifications
2. The harmonic distortion analysis report shall be part of the approval drawing process,
submitted to the engineer for approval. If the calculations determine that harmonic distortion
values are higher than the voltage and current values specified in IEEE 519 -1992, the drive
manufacturer shall provide line reactors of sufficient percent impedance to meet the IEEE
specified values. The line reactor shall be ventilated in the MCC and shall be completely
factory wired and tested with the variable frequency drive.
3. A 5% impedance line reactor that is completely factory wired and tested with the VFD shall
be provided at a minimum regardless of the harmonic analysis results.
2.5 MAIN CONTROL PANEL
A. Controls Enclosure: The main control panel located in the electrical room and housing the PLC and
associated components shall be NEMA 12. The secondary Operator Interface Terminal (OIT)
located in the pump machinery room shall be NEMA 3R rated and be of FRP or 304 stainless
steel construction.
1. Main Control Panel Operator Interface Terminals (Primary and secondary) shall incorporate
all functions of data display, indicating lights, push buttons, selector switches, elapsed
time meters, pump and VFD start/stop and speed control, etc. into the touch screen
through various displays.
2. All internal components shall be mounted and secured to the removable back plate assembly.
All equipment and wiring shall be mounted with the enclosure and labeled for proper
identification.
3. All adjustments and maintenance shall be able to be done form the front of the control
enclosure.
4. Label the main control panel and secondary OIT with Bakelite labels (black with white
lettering).
5. A complete wiring circuit and legend with all terminals, components, and wiring
identification shall be provided.
6. Wiring: Tin - copper wiring
7. Equipment shall be provided with the controls enclosure to assure compliance with current
NEC and UL codes. The entire system shall be assembled, tested, UL listed and
labeled under Standard 508A - -- Enclosed Industrial Control Panels and shipped
complete with drawings generated on AutoCad and electronic files provided with
submittals.
8. Enclosure to include SCADA equipment. Coordinate with SCADA contractor for
equipment dimensions.
9. Size enclosure for 25% future expansion
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 18
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
B. Control Power: Power for the controls shall be provided by a 120 /1/60/20A circuit fed from the
MCC mounted panelboard as noted in the project drawings. Breaker size and conductors to be
coordinated with controls equipment.
1. Main Control Panel shall be fitted with a lockable disconnect switch to isolate incoming
power during maintenance. Disconnecting power at the main control panel shall secure
power to the secondary OIT located in the pump machinery room.
2. Main Control Panel shall be equipped with an Uninterruptible Power Supply — Sola
S3K1600 interactive MINI -Tower AVR power supply.
3. Two levels of surge protection shall be mounted in front of the PLC and instruments. The
minimum single -pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 240kA.
C. Microprocessor Controls, Variable Speed. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall be Square D
Modicon 340 without exception. All control logic shall be handled by the PLC, OID, and OIT
consisting of advanced touch screen panels as specified in this specification.
1. Control software shall be parameter driven, fully documented, and allow user to easily
change all operational parameters.
2. Conditions that shall be displayed on the controller's operator interface display and terminal
(OID & OIT):
a. Suction manifold pressure
b. Discharge manifold pressure
c. Flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM)
d. Pumps(s) speed in revolutions per minute (RPM)
3. Indicators shall be displayed on the OID and OIT include:
a. Individual pump run lights — Green
b. Low Suction manifold pressure —Red
c. High Discharge manifold pressure - Red
d. Low Discharge manifold pressure —Red
e. Individual pump H -O -A switch positions
f. Individual pump running time meters -six digits to two decimal places.
g. Individual VFD /Pump faults- Yellow
4. The main control panel (MCP) with PLC shall include a NEMA 4x (Indoor) rated operator
interface terminal (OID) mounted on the panel door. The secondary Operator Interface
Terminal (OIT) located in the pump room shall be housed in a NEMA 3R rated enclosure
with minimum dimensions of 28 inches in height, 24 inches in width and 8 inches in depth
and be of FRP or 304 stainless steel construction. The OID &OIT shall have identical
capabilities in both display and control. PLC programming and the touchscreen displays
shall have the capability of allowing an operator to select an individual display as the
controlling interface. The display not currently being utilized to control the equipment or
display data shall be continuously updated to mimic actual pump station conditions. OID &
OIT shall have be an advanced touchscreen panel model XBTGT6330 as manufactured by
Schneider Electric or engineer pre- approved equal with the following features:
a. Display type: Backlit color TFT LCD.
b. Display colors: 65,536.
c. Display resolution: 800 x 600 pixels Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA).
d. Display size: 12.1 inches
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 19
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
e. Processor frequency: 266 MHz.
f. Character font: ASCII
g. Memory type: 1 GB Compact flash card
5. Sequencing and Programming of Operations:
05/15/2012
a. General items applying to each alarm circuit shall include a display of condition and
alarm status on the Main Control Panel (MCP) with Outside Interface Display (OID)
in the electrical room and Outside Interface Terminal (OIT) in the pump room.
b. Alarm Sequence:
Low Suction Pressure Alarm. Low Suction Pressure alarm shall protect the
pumps from operating without adequate inlet pressure which could cause
damage to pumps. A pair (2) of pressure transducers shall monitor shall mon-
itor pressure in the suction manifold. Programming in the main control panel
shall include a short time delay to handle transient conditions which can occur
during the starting of a pump. Pumps shall not start until low suction pressure
is corrected and alarm has reset. Alarm conditions shall automatically reset
when pressure is above the alarm set point.
ii. High Discharge Pressure Alarm. High Discharge Pressure alarm circuit shall
shut down pumping system if discharge pressure reaches a predetermined
high level. A pair .(2) of pressure transducers shall monitor pressure in the
discharge manifold. Programming in the main control panel shall include a
short time delay to handle transient conditions which can occur during the
starting of a pump. Pumps shall not start until high discharge pressure is cor-
rected and alarm reset. Alarm conditions shall automatically reset when pres-
sure is below the alarm set point. This alarm shall override the normal (de-
fault) flow rate based mode of operation specified for operational conditions
in the following paragraphs.
iii. Main phase failure and low voltage safety circuit shall retire the pumping sys-
tem if it experiences low voltage, phase failure or phase reversal as monitored
in the MCC. Phase monitor shall have a time delay to allow for transient low
voltage during motor starting. Alarm condition shall require manual reset to
allow for cause determination and corrective action. Operator interface device
(OID), mounted on exterior wall of control room, shall signal phase failure for
any affected pump.
iv. Low Flow Alarm. Low flow alarm circuit shall shut down the pumping
system if flow reaches a predetermined low level. The system flow meter
shall monitor flow in the suction manifold. Programming in the main control
panel shall include a short time delay to handle transient conditions which can
occur during the starting of a pump. Pumps shall not start until the cause is
determined and corrected and alarm has been manually reset. Alarm
conditions shall not automatically reset. Alarm condition shall override the
normal (default) flow rate based mode of operation specified for operational
conditions in the following paragraphs.
v. Activation of any automatically reset alarm, three times within thirty minutes,
shall cause a hard lockout of the pumping system requiring manual reset.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 20
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
c. Functional Sequence, Pressure and Flow Sequencing of Pumps:
05/15/2012
i. Three equal sized pumps shall be alternated based on accumulated run time,
the pump having the least run time starting as lead.
ii. In the event a pump has failed to run or start, or if its power has been discon-
nected, the PLC shall shift the pumping sequence to utilize, the remaining
pump(s).
iii. PLC shall control pump's VFD to operate set flow rates unless over -rided by
activation of low suction and high discharge pressure settings and main phase
failure and low safety voltage circuit. Operator interface device (OID),
mounted on exterior wall of control room, shall signal pump(s) running, flow
rate (GPM), intake header suction and discharge header pressures (feet), and
position of remotely controlled valves (RCV Nos. 1 and 2).
vi. All pump start ups and shut downs shall be ramped and coordinated with the
operation of the motor actuated butterfly valve on each pump discharge line.
d. Default Operating Condition No. 1- This default mode entails one pump operating at a
set discharge rate of 750 GPM; 24 -hours a day, 7 days a week.: The remotely con-
trolled valve, RCV No.1(operated via SCADA) located on the 18 -inch discharge line
on Range Road at the intersection with North Range Road is in the closed position en-
abling the Default Operation Condition No. 1. The pump rate shall be adjustable up to
1,100 GPM.
The Iead pump shall be programmed to run for an initial set time of 8 hours,
upon which it will automatically shut down and transfer the lead pump opera-
tion to the next pump in sequence.
ii. Additionally, operation of the lag pump may be over - ridden and shut down
by: 1) SCADA by either a full tank condition or by manual command, and 2)
by a preset high discharge_pressure alarms on the pump discharge line or the
main phase failure and low safety voltage circuit alarm.
iii. Standby Pump Operation Mode - Set to Maintain Discharge Pressure: A
standby mode, enacted by disruption of SCADA communications with remote
tank levels, remote control valve positions, pump station flow meter (or due to
being out of service), shall transition to lead pump operating at a set discharge
pressure (10 psid default value). The lead pump shall start immediately on a
reduction in discharge pressure. The PLC shall control pump's VFD to main-
tain a set discharge pressure regardless of flow rate. Lead pump shall retire
when flow has decreased to zero as maintained for a time (30 -45 seconds de-
fault value).
e. Exercise Operating Condition No. 2A -. This daily exercise mode entails two pumps
operating to produce a combined constant discharge rate of 2,000 GPM. RCV No.1 is
in the open position enabling the Exercise Operating Condition No. 2. The pump rate
shall be adjustable up to 2,200 GPM.
i. At a set programmed time each day the PLC will send a signal via SCADA to
open RCV No. 1. Upon reaching the full open position the lag pump is enabled
to operate in tandem with the existing lead pump. Both pumps will ramp up
to a total booster pump station discharge rate up to 2,000 GPM.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 21
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
f. Emergency Operating Condition No.2B — Same as Exercise Operating Condition No.
2A, except:
i The opening of RCV No. 1 will be activated by SCADA by sensing (a) speci-
fied tank level(s) or by manual command. Upon reaching the full open posi-
tion the lag pump is enabled to operate in tandem with the existing lead pump.
Both pumps will ramp up to a total booster pump discharge rate up to 2,000
GPM.
ii. Two pumps will operate to maintain a total 2,000 GPM discharge rate until
such time that the lag pump is shut down by: 1) SCADA by either a full tank
condition or by manual command, and 2) by a preset high discharge pressure
alarms on the pump discharge line or the main phase failure and low safety
voltage circuit alarm.
iii. The PLC signals SCADA to close RCV No. 1.
iv. The lead pump ramps down to operating at 750 GPM.
Emergency Supply to Greenland Tank — Condition 3: The purpose of this operational
condition is increase supply to the Greenland Tank (operating on the 597 System Level)
by operating the 8" solenoid actuated pressure reducing valve (RCV No. 2) located in
the vault at the Gate 4 Booster Pump Station Site. This condition shall be displayed on
operator interface device (OID), mounted on exterior wall of control room.
i. The SCADA system, monitoring a drop in the Greenland Tank level, manual-
ly activates the solenoid operation of RCV No. 2 on the Gate 4 Booster Pump
Station Site to the open position.
ii. The SCADA system, monitoring a specified drop in Greenland tank level and
automatically activates the opening of RCV No. 2 to the fully open position.
iii. Upon reaching the open position the lag pump is activated and both pumps
ramp up to a total booster pump discharge rate up to 2,000 GPM.
iv. Two pumps operate to maintain a total 2,000 GPM discharge rate until such
time that the lag pump is shut down by: 1) SCADA by either a full tank condi-
tion or by manual command, or 2) by a set high discharge pressure on the
pump discharge header.
v. Simultaneously, the PLC signals SCADA to close RCV No. 2.
g.
05/15/2012
ii. The two pumps will run for a 2.5 hour period after which time the lag pump
will be shut down. Additionally, operation of the lag pump may be over-
ridden and shut down by: 1) SCADA by either a full tank condition or by
manual command and 2) by a preset high discharge pressure on the pump dis-
charge header or the main phase failure and low safety voltage circuit alarm.
iii. The PLC signals SCADA to close RCV No. 1.
iv. The lead pump ramps down to operating at 750 GPM.
v. Standby Pump Operation Mode - Set to Maintain Discharge Pressure: If the
lead pump is in the standby mode, enacted by disruption of SCADA commu-
nications with remote tank levels, remote control valve positions, pump sta-
tion flow meter (or due to being out of service), the lag pump shall start on a
reduction in discharge pressure (10 psid default value) as maintained for a
time (10 seconds default value). The PLC shall control pump's VFDs to main-
tain a set discharge pressure regardless of flow rate. Lag pump shall retire
when flow has decreased to 65% of the lead pump's capacity as maintained
for a time (30-45 seconds default value).
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 22
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
J•
05/15/2012
vi. Standby Pump Operation Mode - Set to Maintain Discharge Pressure: See
above paragraph e. Exercise Operating Condition No. 2A, sub- paragraph
h. Pump Start-Up: The pump VFD shall ramp pump up from zero flow to the set discharge
rate (or, in Standby Pump Operation Mode, discharge pressure) over 30 seconds. The mo-
tor actuated butterfly valve (DCV No. 1, 2, and/or 3) located on each pump discharge line
shall be programmed to open fully within the same time period. (Alternate Pump Start -UP
Mode: After the pump reaches a specified discharge pressure of 75 PSI, the PLC will ac-
tivate the motor actuated butterfly valve (DCV No. 1, 2, and/or 3) located on the pump
discharge line to open fully within the same time frame as pump ramp up.) Time, pres-
sure and flow rate settings shall be field adjustable on the OIT (Operator interface termi-
nal).
i. Normal Pump Shut Down: Pump shut down under normal power: The pump VFD shall
ramp the pump down to a field adjustable frequency of 50.5 Hz (750 gpm speed) and then
enable the butterfly valve to close. The pump should ramp down to 30 Hz as the valve
closes and once a closed valve condition is noted, pump shutdown is enabled. (Alternate
Normal Pump Shut Down: The motor actuated butterfly valve (DCV No. 1, 2, and/or 3)
located on each pump discharge line to close fully within the same time. Or upon reach-
ing a specified discharge pressure of 75 PSI the PLC will activate the motor actuated but -
terfly valve (DCV No. 1, 2, and/or 3) to close fully within the same time frame as pump
ramp down.) Time, pressure and flow rate settings shall be field adjustable on the OIT
(Operator interface terminal).
Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) Mode: The UPS, located in the electrical room next
to the Motor Control Panel (MCP) shall perform the following upon loss of power:
i. Maintain power to the PLC and position indicator, flow measurement, and pres-
sure inputs. Loss of Power status shall be indicated on the Operator Interface
Device (OID), mounted on the exterior wall of control room.
ii. Maintain power to SCADA communications.
iii. The UPS will reset pump operations to the Default Operating Condition No. 1
and set for a ramped start up of the lead pump upon return of power.
iv. Emergency Shut Down (ESD) of the Pump Discharge Butterfly Valve(s): Power
DCV No. 1, 2 and/or 3 in the Emergency Shut Down (ES) mode to a rapid clo-
sure in under five (5) seconds.
D. The main control panel (MCP) with PLC shall provide power to and accept signals from the
instrumentation provided by the Owner to include four (4) Rosemont 3051 S pressure transducers
mounted two each on the suction and discharge manifolds in a primary/back -up arrangement and
the Rosemont 8712E flow meter as specified in Section 335100, WATER SUPPLY MAIN. In
addition, the main control panel shall provide power to and accept an analog (4 -20 mA) position
signal from the three (3) pump discharge valves' Limitorque QX actuators to be provided by the
general contractor and as specified in Section 335100, WATER SUPPLY MAIN.
E. The main control panel (MCP) shall communicate directly with the pump station and the
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system via Ethernet communication protocol.
The SCADA system shall be installed into the main control panel.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 23
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
F. Contractor shall insure compatibility between instrumentation and PLC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.0 GENERAL
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to install
and connect the pumping system and supporting site and building infrastructure. The Contractor is
responsible for preparing, submitting for review and approval, implementing, and completing a
testing plan resulting in the testing of all system components, i.e., pressure testing of pipe and
valves, disinfection, etc., prior to scheduled start-up and system testing.
A. PUMP ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1. Install the pump assemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
05/15/2012
2. Pump assembly foundations shall conform to the requirements of the Hydraulic Institute
Standards with a mass no less than five (5) times the weight of the pump assembly.
3. Anchor bolts with embedment hook shall engage reinforcing bar, or a nut and plate washer
provided as determined by the project engineer, or epoxy set anchors provided as indicated
on the plans. Bolts, nut, and washer shall be stainless steel.
4. Foundation shall be poured to within 0.75 — 1.50" of finished height and allowed to cure for
a minimum of several days prior to placing the pump assembly and grouting to the finished
height.
5. Install the pump assembly on the foundation with blocks, shims or wedges around the
baseplate perimeter to bring the base plate to final height with the base level and plumb as
verified by checking flange faces and motor and pump shafts.
6. Lightly torque foundation bolts and verify assembly alignment.
7. Alignment of the pump assembly shall be verified by the pump manufacturer's
representative prior to grouting the assembly base plate.
8. Grout the foundation following the pump manufacturer's procedures with the use of an
approved non - shrinking grout such as Embeco® 636 Plus or 885.
9 Torque pump assembly anchor bolts fully after grout has thoroughly hardened (minimum
of 24 hours).
10. Plumb pump suction and discharge piping to the pump flanges without inducing any undue
stress on the flanges.
11. Pump assembly final alignment must be verified prior to start -up as noted in the following
Section 3.1 of this specification.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 24
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
12. Seal pump assembly grout exposed edges with an oil based paint approximately fourteen
(14) days after curing.
13. Field install base plate drain piping from the 3/4" NPT connection on the pump end of the
base plate and the 1/4" NPT outlet piping from the air release valve located on the top of
the pump casing to the flow floor drain located adjacent to base of each pump foundation.
The two drain lines may be combined into one prior to vertical drop to floor drain.
3.1 START UP
A. When discharge piping, electrical connections, and electrical inspection have been completed, the
pump, valve and MCC/VFD/MCP manufacturers shall be contacted for start-up.
B. Pump manufacturer representative shall conduct final alignment verification on all pumps prior to
start-up.
C. A minimum two week notice shall be given to manufacturers prior to scheduled start up date.
D. Start-Up Testing:
1. During start up, the complete system shall be inspected for proper installation,
and shall be given a running test of normal start and stop, and full and partial load operating
conditions. •
2. During this test, each component shall demonstrate its ability to operate without undue
vibration, or overheating and shall demonstrate its general fitness for service.
3. All defects shall be corrected and adjustments made at the expense of the manufacturer.
4. Test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
E. Start up services shall consist of one (1) trip for a total of two (2) days.
3.2 SYSTEM FIELD TEST
A. The entire pumping station shall be flow tested across its entire range to demonstrate all operating
conditions (1, 2A and 2B and 3) prescribed in these specifications. Field testing shall be conducted
after the initial start-up in completed and all discrepancies arising from the initial start-up are
corrected. Field testing support shall be provided by all equipment manufacturers, including pump
and MCCIVFD), to include one (1) trip of two (2) days.
B. System shall be supplied with the established minimum suction pressure, and adequate flow for
testing of the pumps, drives, valves and flow meter.
C. All electrical controls and circuits shall be included in the system test, as shall their interface to the
motors and the outputs to the SCADA system.
D. System factory flow test results shall be provided in the form of an X -Y plot utilizing the installed
flow meter and pressure transducers. Data shall be acquired and plotted for each of the four (4)
operating conditions (1, 2A, 2B & 3). Results shall be forwarded to the engineer for review and
included in the pump assembly IOM.
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 25
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
E. Any failure in the tests, either for any pump, control or for the system, shall be corrected by the
manufacturer at his expense, and the test repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Training shall be conducted after successful completion of initial start -up and field testing.
Training shall be conducted by qualified field service personnel and include all equipment modes of
operation, routine and preventative maintenance, corrective maintenance, and troubleshooting.
B. Training shall be conducted for all end user personnel. Manufacturers shall include one (1) trip of
one (1) day for conducting training.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturers shall warrant their equipment to be free of defects in workmanship for a period
of one (1) year from owner's acceptance.
B. Provided that all installation and operation responsibilities have been properly performed,
manufacturer shall provide a replacement part or component during the warranty life. Any repairs to
be accomplished at manufacturer's expense must be pre - authorized. The start-up certificate must
on file with manufacturer to activate warranty. Upon request, manufacturer shall provide advice for
trouble shooting of a defect during the warranty period.
C. Manufacturer shall use only first quality material. As with any mechanical or electrical device,
preventive maintenance efforts are required to assure an adequate service life. A periodic preventive
maintenance program recommendation shall be included in the owner's manual. Manufacturer shall
support a large national network of technical service technicians. Manufacturer's field service
technicians shall be contacted for service. Because of varied conditions beyond the control of
manufacturer, this warranty may not be valid or may not cover damage as follows:
1. Default of any agreement with manufacturer.
2. Misuse, abuse, or failure to conduct routine maintenance.
3. Handling any liquid other than clean water.
4. Exposure to electrolysis, erosion, or abrasion.
5. Presence of destructive gaseous or chemical solutions.
6. Over voltage or unprotected low voltage.
7. Unprotected electrical phase loss or phase reversal.
END OF SECTION 331223
MULTI -PLEX BOOSTER PUMP STATION 331223 - 26
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. ' Section Includes:
1. Pipe and fittings.
2. Nonpressure transition couplings.
3. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.
4. Drains.
5. Manholes.
6. Channel drainage systems.
7. Catch basins.
8. Stormwater inlets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.
2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,
covers, and grates.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same
trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial
relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of cast -iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.
E. Field quality- control reports.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
05/15/2012
D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
05/15/2012
A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated HDPE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 3 to NPS 10: AASHTO M 252M, Type S,
with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.
B. Corrugated HDPE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with
smooth waterway for coupling joints.
1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.
C. Perforations: Provide standard GDOT perforations where noted on drawings.
2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (Only where indicated on drawings)
A. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:
1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell - and - spigot ends for
gasketed joints.
2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends.
3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
B. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:
1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T -1 wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell -
and- spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.
2.3 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for
joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable
product by one of the following:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco Inc.
c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
d. NDS Inc.
e. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.
2. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless -steel shear ring and corrosion- resistant-
metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
2.4 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:
1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with
provision for sealant joints.
2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section as
required to prevent flotation.
4. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness
for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
5. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.
6. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or flat- slab -top type is
indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection.
9. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch steel reinforcing rods encased in
ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and
designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to
16 -inch intervals.
10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and
diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole
frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
11. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, to match diameter
of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to
indicated elevation and slope.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers:
05/15/2012
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Description: Ferrous; 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch- minimum width
flange and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into
cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."
2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
05/15/2012
13. Portland Cement Design Mix: 3000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water /cementitious
materials ratio.
1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 /A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
2.6 CATCH BASINS
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:
1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with
provision for sealant joints.
2. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness
for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
3. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, 48 -inch diameter, and lengths to provide
depth indicated.
4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric - cone or flat- slab -top type is
indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape
snatching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced - concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total
thickness, that match 24 -inch- diameter frame and grate.
8. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch steel reinforcing rods encased in
ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and
designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to
16 -inch intervals.
9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to
base section.
13. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile iron designed for A -16, structural
loading. Include flat grate with small square or short - slotted drainage openings.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.
C. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile iron designed for A -16, structural
loading. Include 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch minimum width flange, and 26-
inch- diameter flat grate with small square or short- slotted drainage openings.
1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Weir Inlets: Made with vertical opening.
B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
05/15/2012
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where
specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe -
jacking process of microtunneling.
F. Install gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.
2. Install piping with 48 -inch minimum cover unless specifically indicated on drawings.
3. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Putnp Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
4. Install PVC water - service piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
05/15/2012
A. Join gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push -on joints.
2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-
seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric- gasketed joints.
3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure -type flexible couplings.
3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
3.5 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.6 STORMWA3'ER INLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head waIis, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.9 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
05/15/2012
fitting, plus 6 -inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of . concrete with 28 -day
compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove
section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye
with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to
underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an
opening large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering
connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to
conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside
of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for
minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to
undisturbed ground.
a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi
unless otherwise indicated.
b. Use epoxy- bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and
piping materials.
4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from
entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that
may accumulate.
B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to
piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity -flow, nonpressure
sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.
b. Unshielded, increaser /reducer- pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different
OD.
c. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may
result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable
methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and
use one procedure below:
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to
within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with
concrete.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange
for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground
structures.
1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over trench drain (perforated) piping.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Gravity -Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, UNI -B -6, and the following:
a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.
c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.
d. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.
END OF SECTION 334100
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 9
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
SECTION 335100 - WATER SUPPLY MAIN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Reference Section 331223, Multi -Plex Booster Pumps
C. Reference Appendix to this Section for referenced Augusta Utility Department Standard
Specification on ductile iron pipe and fittings, fire hydrants, and disinfection.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water - distribution piping and specialties for the following:
1. Public water supply main.
B. Utility - furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for
installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Public Water Supply Main: Exterior water piping for portable water supply.
B. The following are industry abbreviations for ductile iron pipe materials:
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I. DIP: Ductile Iron Pipe.
2. RJP: Restrained Joint Pipe.
3. RJF: Restrained Joint Fittings.
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Valves and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
I. Precast concrete vaults, including frames and covers, ladders, and drains.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
05/15/2012
335100 - 1
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2. Pipe Shop Drawings: Marking and fabrication plans and details fo showing dimensions, pipe
joints, fittings, pressure rating and thickness, size, coating and lining data. Plan shall confirm
joint restraint plan for both horizontal and vertical applications.
C. Field Quality- Control Test Reports: From Contractor.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of piping
and specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of Augusta Utility Department Standards and Specificaitons,
latest edition. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.
C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew -
point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to
avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory - applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
F. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
335100 - 2
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with Augusta Utility Department. Contractor is responsible
for verifying the exact location, size, and material of existing water system infrastructure
proposed for connection or use by the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
05/15/2012
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications_ Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Reference Section 3 05 01.02 "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ", appended.
1. Buried pipe shall be Push -On Restrained Joint Pipe. All buried pipe on this project shall have
a 350 psi pressure rating.
2. Pipe in vaults and above floor slab in pump station shall be flanged end pipe. Pipe wall
thickness of threaded pipe for a flanged pipe end shall be minimum special thickness Class
53 from 12 -inch to 18 -inch diameter in accordance with AWWA C115.
B. Ductile Iron Fittings: Reference Section 3 05 01.02 "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ", appended.
1. Buried Pipe fittings shall be mechanical joint with Meg -a -Lug joint restraint glands by
EBAA Iron or Equal.
2. Above ground pipe in vaults shall be flanged end or, where specified, an EBAA Series 2100
Restrained Flange Adapter shall be utilized.
3. Thrust Restraint: In reference to Section 3.03.H, thrust blocking is not allowed at only where
noted on drawing except on existing 12" line at tapping sleeve and valve.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 3
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.4 AWWA 509, Cast -Iron Gate Valves (4" and 10 "):
A Manufacturers:
1. Mueller, M &H, Val - Matic, GA Industries or approved equal.
2. OS &Y, Rising -Stem, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves: Description: Cast- or ductile -iron body
and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile -iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
a. Standard: AWWA C509.
b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig.
c. End Connections: Flanged.
d. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
e. Above ground or vault installation.
f. Operation - Counter clockwise to open.
3. Non -rising -Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: Cast- or ductile -iron body and bonnet; with
bronze or gray- or ductile -iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
b. End Connections: Mechanical joint.
c. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
d. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
e. Buried installation.
f. Operation- Counter clockwise to open.
2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES (10" and 12 ")
A. AWWA C504 Butterfly Valves, AWWA Class 150B, except locations on discharge side of pump
shall be AWWA Class 2508.:
1. Scope: All butterfly valves shall be of the rubber- seated tight - closing type, gear operated.
They shall meet or exceed AWWA Standard C504. Butterfly valves shall be M &H Series
4500, Val -Matic Series 2000, GA Industries Series 800, or approved equal.
2. Standard, Approvals and Verification:
a. The valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA
Standard ANSI/AWWA C504.
b. Valves shall be proof of design tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C504, and
certified to ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects.
c. Manufacturer shall have a quality management system that is certified to ISO
9001:2000 by an accredited, certifying body.
3. Connections: Flanged end connections shall fully conform with ANSI B16.1 for Class 125,
Class 250 iron flanges, or AWWA C207. Both 125 and 250 flanges shall be flat faced.
Accessories (bolts, glands, and gaskets) shall be supplied by the valve manufacturer.
4. Design:
05/15/2012
335100 - 4
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
a. Valve shafts shall be of the through -type. Shafts shall be locked to the disc by 0 -Ring
sealed taper pins retained with stainless steel nuts.
b. Valve discs shall be of the solid type without external ribs or vanes to obstruct flow.
c. Resilient seats shall be shall be located on the valve disc and shall provide a 360
degree continuous, uninterrupted seating surface. Seats shall be mechanically retained
with a stainless steel retaining ring and stainless steel Nylok cap screws which shall
pass through both the resilient seat and the retaining ring. The retaining ring shall be
continuous or investment cast with overlapping sections, serrated grooves, and
shoulders providing a Tri -Cloc system. The resilient seat's mating surface shall be to a
360 degree continuous stainless steel body seat ring. Resilient seats shall be field
adjustable and replaceable and shall not require hypodermic needles or pressure
vessels to replace or adjust.
d. Sleeve bearings shall be provided.
e. Shaft seals shall be of the V -type and shall be replaceable without removal of the
valve from the line or the shaft from the valve.
f. Operation- Counter clockwise to open.
5. Materials:
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
a. Body: Class 150B valve bodies shall be high strength cast iron ASTM Al26, Class B
with 18 -8. Class 250B valve bodies shall be ASTM A536 Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile
iron.
b. Disc: Valve disc shall be ASTM A536 Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron.
c. Shafts: Shafts shall be ASTM A276 type 304. Valve shaft shall be one piece
extending full size through the entire valve.
d. Seat: Resilient seat shall be Bun -N and mate to a type 316 stainless steel body seat
ring. Resilient seat shall be a full circle 360 degree seat not penetrated by the valve
shaft.
e. Hardware: All seat retaining hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel.
Rubber seat shall be a full- circle 360 seat not penetrated by the valve shaft.
6. Actuation - Manual (Handwheel), except on pump discharge piping (3 locations) provide
Electric Motor with Handwheel and Declutch Lever:
a. Manual operator torque rating shall be throughout entire travel, to provide capability
for operation in emergency service on pump supply piping.
b. Electric Motor actuator (Limitorque QX as manufactured by Flowserve Corporation)
The actuator shall consist of an electric motor, mechanical gear reduction, absolute
position encoder with redundancy, electronic torque sensor, solid state motor
controller, electronic control, protection, and monitoring package, manual override
handwheel, valve interface bushing, 32- character graphical Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD), and local control switches all contained in an enclosure that is sealed to
NEMA 4, 4X, 6, 1P68 to 20M for 168 hours (and XP as required). Actuator design life
shall be at least one million drive sleeve turns.
c. The power transmission shall be completely bearing - supported, and consist of a
hardened alloy steel worm and alloy worm gear, and spur gear reduction, all immersed
in an oil -bath lubricated using a synthetic oil designed specifically for extreme
pressure worm and worm gear transmission service.
d. The motor shall be able to energize on either single phase /60 Hertz (110/125) or
single phase /50 Hertz (220/250) or three -phase / 60 -Hertz (208, 230, 360, 440, 460,
335100 - 5
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
575 V) or three -phase / 50 -Hertz (380, 400, 440, 415, 525 V), or 24 -48 Vdc incoming
power as provided by PLC. Advanced brushless DC motors shall be standard.
Brushed DC motors are not permitted. Motor must permit a global range of voltages
(single -phase and three -phase ACV and DCV) to be connected without modification.
The motor must have as a minimum class F insulation and a thermistor embedded
within the motor windings to prevent damage due to over -load. The motor shall be
easily removed through the use of a plug -in connector and shaft coupling.
e. Valve position shall be sensed by an absolute position encoder, employing system -on-
chip technology using a contactless magnet that excites Hall effect devices to provide
redundant, 12 -bit resolution over 360 degrees. Each of the position sensing circuits
shall be redundant, permitting up to 50% fault tolerance before the position is
incorrectly reported. The BIST feature shall discern which failures signal a warning
only and which require a warning plus safe shutdown of the actuator. Open and closed
positions shall be stored in permanent, nonvolatile memory. The encoder shall
measure valve position at all times, including both motor and handwheel operation,
with or without power present, and without the use of a battery. The absolute encoder
will be capable of resolving down to 0.1% of output shaft position over 360 degrees.
f. An electronic torque sensor shall be included. The torque limit may be adjusted from
40 to 100% of rating in 1% increments. The motor shall be de- energized if the torque
limit is exceeded. A boost function shall be included to prevent torque trip during
initial valve unseating and during extreme arctic temperature operation (down to -
60°C), and a "Jammed Valve" protection feature, with automatic retry sequence, shall
be incorporated to de- energize the motor if no movement occurs.
g. The control module shall include logic circuit boards mounted to a steel plate and
attached in the control compartment with captive screws. The use of O -rings or other
such devices to secure the control boards shall not be permitted. The module shall be
easily removed through the use of plug -in connectors. The module shall also include a
solid state motor controller board, local control switches, 32- character graphical LCD,
and LED indicators. It shall also be Bluetooth ready. All internal wiring shall be
flame - resistant, rated 105 °C, and UL/CSA listed. Voltage shall be software detectable
and configurable.
h. The motor controller shall perform as the motor reverser and shall be solid state with
no moving mechanical parts. The control module shall also include an auto reversal
delay to inhibit high current surges caused by rapid motor reversals.
A phase correction circuit shall be included to correct motor rotation faults caused by
incorrect site wiring. The phase circuit shall also detect the loss of a phase.
The monitor relay shall trip and a warning message shall be displayed on the LCD
screen to alert the User that, although the QX remains fully functional, higher current
will be drawn from the remaining two power lines as long as the phase fault persists.
j. Discrete remote control may be configured as two, three, or four wires for open -stop-
close control. Remote control functions may be powered by external 24 VDC, 125
VAC, or the actuator's internal 24 VDC supply. The voltage values for signal
threshold shall be 19.2 VAC/VDC and 5.0 VAC/VDC, respectively. The maximum
load for 24 VDC is 2 mA. The internal supplies shall be protected against over current
and short circuit faults by utilizing optical isolation to minimize electromagnetic
interference. Discrete control shall have an isolated common.
k. Multi -mode remote control shall be included which permits discrete two, three, or
four wires, or network (Fieldbus) for open -stop -close control. The actuator shall be
capable of also distinguishing analog control for modulating applications. The
actuator shall respond to the last signal received. Remote control functions may be
WATER SUPPLY MAN
335100 - 6
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05 /15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
powered by external 24 VDC, 125 VAC, or the actuator's internal 24 VDC supply.
The voltage values for signal threshold shall be 19.2 VAC/VDC and 5.0 VAC/VDC,
respectively. The maximum load for 24 VDC is 2 mA. The internal supplies shall be
protected against over current and short circuit faults and utilizes optical isolation to
minimize electromagnetic interference. Discrete control shall have an isolated
common.
1. Emergency Shut Down (ESD) provision shall be included in each actuator. The
actuator shall permit up to three inputs for ESD and they shall be configurable. The
ESD signal shall oven-ide any existing signal (except LOCAL, STOP, and INHIBIT)
and send the valve to its configured emergency position. The ESD may also be
configured to override LOCAL, STOP, and/or INHIBIT. Provision for an isolated
common shall also be provided.
m. Inhibit movement provision shall be included in each actuator. The actuator shall
permit up to three inputs for Inhibits and they shall be configurable. Provision for an
isolated common shall also be provided.
n. Terminals shall be included to connect the electronic controls package, including
display, to a backup 24 VDC power source. As an optional alternative, the actuator
shall have the ability to maintain the status and alarm contacts in order to update status
to the control room and also provides status visibility on the LCD screen without main
power applied. It should be configurable for at least one hour and, once main power is
restored, be available for the next unforeseen power outage. The use of an integral
battery is prohibited.
o. A dedicated circuit to prevent undesired valve operation in the event of an internal
circuit fault or erratic command signal shall be included. A single point failure will
not result in erratic actuator movement. An open or short circuit in the internal circuit
board logic shall not energize nor de-energize the motor controller. The command
inputs shall be optically coupled and require a pulse width from at least 250 ins to 350
ms to turn on or off. In the event of an internal circuit fault, an alarm shall be signaled
by tripping the Monitor Relay and through LCD indication.
p. Four latched status contacts rated 125 VAC, 0.5 A and 30 VDC, 2 A shall be provided
for remote indication of valve position, configured as 1 -N /O and 1 -N /C for both the
open and closed positions. Two contacts may be configured to represent any other
actuator status; mid - travel position, switched to local, overtorque, motor over
temperature, manual operation, switched to remote, switched to stop, valve moving,
close torque switch, open torque switch, hardware failure, ESD active, inhibits active,
valve jammed, analog IP (input) lost, lost phase, and network controlled. The other
two will be complementary.
q. A monitor relay shall be included and shall trip when the actuator is not available for
remote operation. Both N/O and N/C contacts shall be included, rated 125 VAC, 0.5
A and 30 VDC, 2 A. The monitor relay shall be configurable for three additional fault
indications: lost phase, valve jammed, and motor over temperature. The yellow LED
shall blink when the monitor relay is active. The monitor relay configuration shall
provide provision to be disabled.
r. The ACP (Actuator Control Panel) cover and module shall use solid -state Hall- effect
devices for local communication and configuration. The use of reed switches on the
module is prohibited. A 32- character, graphical LCD shall be included to display
valve position as a percent of open, 0 -100 %, and current actuator status. "STATUS
OK" shall be displayed for an operable actuator. If the actuator is not operable, the
appropriate alarm shall be displayed. The alarm shall be continuously displayed until
the actuator is operable. Red, green, and yellow LEDs shall be included for open,
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 7
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
close, stopped, and moving indication. The Red and Green LEDs shall be reversible.
A padlockable LOCAL - STOP - REMOTE switch and an OPEN -CLOSE switch shall
be included for local valve actuator control. The control switches shall not penetrate
the controls cover and shall be designed to electrically isolate the actuator's internal
components from the external environment. The OPEN -CLOSE switch may be
configured for maintained or push -to -run (inching) control.
s. The device shall be non - intrusive -All calibration/configuration shall be possible
without removing any covers and without the use of any special tools. All calibration
shall be performed in clear text languages; no icons shall be used. All calibration
shall be performed by answering the "YES" and "NO" questions displayed on the
LCD. "YES" is signaled by using the OPEN switch and "NO" by using the CLOSE
switch, as indicated adjacent to the switches. A configurable password option shall be
available to prevent unauthorized changes.
t. Double sealed terminal compartment and terminal block -All customer connections
shall be located in a terminal chamber that is separately sealed from all other actuator
components. Site wiring shall not expose actuator components to the environment.
The internal sealing within the terminal chamber is suitable for NEMA 4, 6, and 1P68
to 20M for 168 hours. The terminal block shall include screw -type terminals, three for
power and 54 for control, for site connections. It shall also have provisions for the
addition of a safety shield to be attached over the incoming power terminals.
u. Four conduit entries, available as: (1) - 1.25" NPT (M32) and (3) -1.0" NPT (M25 —1
optional) shall be located in the terminal chamber.
v. Coatings -The actuator shall be coated with a polymer powder coat. The coating
system shall be suitable for an ASTM B117 salt spray test of 1500 hours. External
fasteners shall be stainless steel. The fasteners shall be suitable for an ASTM B117
salt spray test of 500 hours.
w. A handwheel and declutch lever shall be provided for manual operation. The
handwheel shall not rotate during electric operation nor can a seized motor prevent
manual operation. Changing from motor to manual operation is accomplished by
engaging the declutch lever. Energizing the motor shall return the actuator to motor
operation. The lever shall be padlockable to permit motor operation only.
x. The actuator shall include a removable torque bushing to mate with the valve shaft.
y. Diagnostic facilities shall be included to accumulate and report the performance of the
motor, encoder, contactor, cycle time, handwheel operations, actuator ID, firmware
revision, and output turns. In addition, a torque profile of the reference baseline valve
stroke and the last valve stroke shall be included. A feature for reset shall be provided.
Alt diagnostic information shall be displayed on the LCD. Diagnostics shall also
include a Frequency Domain Analysis (FDA) feature. The FDA methodology shall
capture torque, position or speed values at regular time intervals while the actuator is
motoring, and calculate the resulting data set with a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT).
The resulting information shall be used to isolate any components in the mechanical
drive train that may exhibit excessive wear or may affect normal actuator operation.
FDA and resultant fault indications shall be displayed via the graphical LCD. The
actuator shall contain the ability for diagnostics information to be downloaded to a PC
or PDA via both IRDA and Bluetooth ports.
z. Factory testing -Every actuator shall be factory tested to verify: rated output torque,
output speed, handwheel operation, local control, control power supply, valve jammed
function, all customer inputs and outputs, motor current, motor thermistor, LCD and
LED operation, direction of rotation, microprocessor checks, and position - sensor
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 8
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
checks. A report confirming successful completion of testing shall be included with
the actuator.
7. Coatings Valve exteriors for above ground service shall be coated with a universal, alkyd
primer. Valve interiors shall be coated with an ANSI/NSF 61 epoxy coating approved for
potable water. Fusion bonded epoxy shall be supplied on the exterior and interior.
2.6 CHECK VALVES- Rubber Flapper Type (10 "):
A. Scope
1. This specification is intended to cover the design, manufacture, and testing of 2 in. (50mm)
through 42 in. (1000 mm) a "Rubber Flapper" type Swing Check Valves suitable for cold
working pressures of 250 psig .in water, wastewater, abrasive, and slurry service.
2. The check valve shall be of the full body type, with a domed access cover and only two mov-
ing parts, the flexible disc and the disc accelerator.
B. Standards, Approvals and Verification
1. The valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water
Works Association Standards ANSI /AWWA C508.
2. Manufacturer shall have a quality management system that is certified to ISO 9001:2000 by
an accredited, certifying body.
C. Connections
1. Valves shall be provided with flanges in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125.
D. Design
1. The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at all points through the
valve. The 4 in. (350mm) valve shall be capable of passing a 3 in. (75mm) sphere. The seat-
ing surface shall be on a 45 degree angle to minimize disc travel. A threaded port with pipe
plug shall be provided on the bottom of the valve to allow for field installation of a backflow
actuator, air cushion or hydraulic cushion without special tools or removing the valve from
the line
2. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the
valve from the line. The access cover shall be domed in shape to provide flushing action over
the disc for operating in lines containing high solids content. A threaded port with pipe plug
shall be provided in the access cover to allow for field installation of a mechanical, disc posi-
tion indicator.
3. The disc shall be of one piece construction, precision molded with an integral o -ring type
sealing surface, and contain alloy steel and nylon reinforcement in the flexible hinge area.
The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for twenty five years. Non- Slam closing
characteristics shall be provided through a short 35 degree disc stroke and a disc accelerator.
4. The disc accelerator shall be of one piece construction and provide rapid closure of the valve
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 -9
05/15/2012
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
in high head applications. The disc accelerator shall be enclosed within the valve and shall
be field adjustable and replaceable without removal of the valve from the line. The disc ac-
celerator shall be securely held in place by being captured between the cover and disc. It
shall be formed with a large radius to allow smooth movement over the disc surface.
5. The valve disc shall be cycle tested 1,000,000 times in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C508
and show no signs of wear, cracking, or distortion to the valve disc or seat and shall remain
drop tight at both high and low pressures. The test results shall be independently certified.
E. Materials
1. The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron
or ASTM A 126 Class B for 30 in. and larger. Optional body materials include ASTM A -351
Grade CF8M, stainless steel (sizes 3" through 8 ").
2. The disc shall be precision molded Buna -N (NBR), ASTM D2000 -BG. Optional disc materi-
al includes Viton.
3. The disc accelerator shall be type 302 stainless steel.
F. Additional Features:
1. A mechanical indicator shall be provided (when specified) to provide disc position indication
on valves 4" and larger. The indicator shall have continuous contact with the disc under all
operating conditions to assure accurate disc position indication.
2. A pre -wired limit switch will be provided (when specified) to indicate open/closed position
to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the external po-
sition indicator. The switch shall be rated for NEMA 4, 6, or 6P and shall have U.L. rated 5
amp. 12 or 250 VAC contacts.
G. Manufacture
1. The manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years experience in the manufac-
ture of resilient, flexible disc check valves with air and hydraulic cushions.
2. All valves shall be hydrostatically tested and seat tested to demonstrate zero leakage. When
requested the manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list
drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals.
3. The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with an ANSI/NSF 61 approved fusion
bonded epoxy coating.
4. The "Rubber Flapper" type Swing Check Valves shall be Series #7200 as manufactured by
Val- Matic® Valve & Manufacturing Corporation, Elmhurst, IL. USA or Fig. SB200D as
manufactured by GA Industries or approved equal.
2.7 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (8 "):
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 10
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project NoJCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
A. Operation: The pressure reducing valve shall reduce a high incoming pressure to a lower, constant
discharge pressure regardless of variations in upstream pressure. The valve shall be Ross Model
40WR -R Figure 11. The valve shall be normally closed and activated to the full open position by a
solenoid. The valve with operate under the following conditions:
1. Flow rate: Up to 1900 gpm.
2. Upstream pressure: 160 psi, maximum sustained.
3. Discharge pressure: Set constant to between 125 psi and 145 psi.
13. Design:
1. The pressure reducing valve shall be flanged body, fully mounted, external pilot operated,
with free floating piston (operated without springs, diaphragm or levers), single seat with
seat bore equal to size of valve. The minimum travel of the piston shall be equal to 25% of
the diameter of the seat. For true alignment, the piston shall be guided above and below the
seat a distance equal to no less than 75% of the diameter of the seat to correct lateral thrust
and stem binding. Piston shall be cushioned and so designed as to insure positive closure.
The main valve shall be packed with Ieather (or other soft material) to insure tight closure
and prevent metal -to -metal friction and seating. Furnished with indicator rod & stuffing box
to show position of piston opening. The design shall be such that repairs and dismantling in-
ternally of main valve may be made without its removal from the line.
2. The hydraulic pilot(s) with a range for adjustment and controlling the operation of main
valve, shall be easily accessible, and so arranged with isolation ball valves to allow for its
removal from the control circuit while the main valve is under pressure. An external strainer
with flushing cock shall be provided in the control circuit to protect the pilot and speed con-
trol valve(s).
3. The external controls and associated rigid brass piping/fittings necessary for proper operation
(except the separate static pressure sensing line if required), shall be factory assembled and
furnished with the main valve. Brass bushings with gauge cock on inlet and outlet of main
valve to receive pressure gauges for testing purposes.
4. A pre -wired limit switch will be provided to indicate open/closed position to a remote loca-
tion. The switch shall be rated for NEMA 4, 6, or 6P and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp. 12 or
250 VAC contacts.
C. Physical and Chemical Properties:
i . Valve body and caps shall be constructed of gray iron castings that conform to ASTM Speci-
fication A 126 Class B, ductile iron castings that conform to ASTM Specification A536 -84,
or steel castings that conform to ASTM Specification A216 Grade WCB.
2. Bronze parts shall conform to ASTM Specification B -62. Stainless parts shall conform to ASTM
Specification A743 Grade CF -8 or CF -8M. Teflon coated parts shall receive two coats of Teflon
TFE with a total minimum thickness of 10 mils.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 11
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
05/15/2012
3. The main bushing, Part #14 and bottom cap cylinder, Part #23, shall be supplied with Teflon
coating. The Teflon shall be applied in two parts:
Part 1 shall be a primer Teflon coating, with a minimum thickness of 5 mils. Part 2 shall be a
finish coat of Teflon TFE with a minimum thickness of 5 mils. for a final coat minimum
thickness of 10 mils.
4. The seat ring, Part #24, seat skirt, Part #8 and seat ring bolts, nuts and washers shall be Grade
304 Stainless Steel.
5. The flanged assemblies shall conform to ANSI standards for wall thickness of body and caps,
and flange thickness and drilling, subject to other specified standards.
D. Tests:
A hydrostatic test shall be performed at the factory prior to shipment. The valve shall be tested to
two (2) times the working pressure, maximum 500 psi testing pressure, subject to contract. The
valve performance and hydrostatic tests may be witnessed by the customer /engineer or representa-
tive.
E. Painting:
1. Ferrous surfaces of valve shall be coated with NSF Certified Epoxy (Tnemec Series FC20 or
N 140F) in accordance with ANSI/NSF Std. 61, and conforms to AWWA D 102 Inside System
No. 1.
2. Valve shall be equal in all respects to the Model 40WR -R Figure 11 as manufactured by the
Ross Valve Mfg. Co., Inc.
2.8 SURGE RELIEF VALVE (4 "):
A. The surge relief valve shall function to open quickly when the system pressure exceeds the setting
for which the pilot is set. The valve shall close slowly at an adjustable speed once the system pres-
sure subsides below the setting of the pilot.
B. The valve body shall be heavy -duty cast iron angle (or globe) design with integral flanges per
ANSI B16. Valve bodies with Class 125 flanges shall have a minimum working pressure of 250
psi to 12" size. Valve bodies with Class 250 flanges shall have a minimum working pressure of
400 psi to 12 ".
C. The main valve shall operate on the differential piston principle such that the area on the underside
of the piston is no less than the pipe area and the area on the upper surface of the piston is greater
than the underside. There shall be no diaphragms in the main valve.
D. The valve piston shall be guided on its outside over the full length of its stroke by long stationary
vee -ports downstream of the seating surface to minimize the consequences of throttling. All
throttling shall be by the veeports and not by the seat itself. All internal guiding and sealing
surfaces shall be bronze per ASTM B62.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 12
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
E. The valve shall be fully capable of operating in any position without the use of springs. There shall
be no stems, spokes or stem guides within the waterway. The flow area through the valve shall be
no less than the area of its nominal pipe size.
F. Surge relief valve shall include an all bronze, spring loaded, normally closed, balanced, diaphragm
operated resilient seated pilot valve, y- strainer, visual position indicator, stop valves and adjustable
closing speed control.
G. There shall be one flanged cover through which all service can be accomplished without removing
the valve from the line. Surge relief valve shall be Figure 6600 (Angle) as manufactured by GA
Industries Val - Matic® Valve & Manufacturing Corporation, or equal.
2.9 VALVES ECCENTRIC PLUG (12 "):
A. General
B. Body
C. Plug
D. Seat
1. Eccentric plug valve, ANSI Class 125 or mechanical joint, unless specified differently or by the
plans. 12" valve shall be rated 175 prig for bi- directional bubbletight shutoff.
1. The body shall he constructed from ASTM Al26, Class B cast iron and shall be rated ANSI
Class 125. End connections:
E. Stem Seal
a. Flanges shall be integrally cast with the body and shall conform to ANSI B16.1 Class
D.
b. Mechanical joint shall be integrally cast with the body and shall conform to AWWA
ANSI C 111 standards.
1. The plug shall be constructed from ASTM A536, Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron or ASTM A 126,
Class B cast iron for all sizes through 72 ". The plug shall be one -piece construction, and shall be
encapsulated with an elastomer. The elastomer shall be EPDM for temperatures greater than 225
degrees F, and Buna -N for all other services. The plug shall provide full bidirectional shutoffca-
pability. The CLOSED position travel stop for the plug shall be externally adjustable.
1. The seat shall be 99 percent nickel alloy, welded into the body. The seat thickness shall be min-
imum 0.125 inch thick. Plated, screwed or sprayed seats are not acceptable.
1. The stem seal shall be a self - adjusting elastomer U cup design. The stern seal elastomer shall
be same as the plug elastomer. 0-ring seals and single piece packing arrangements are not ac-
ceptable.
F. Bearings
1. The bearings on valve shall be replaceable sleeve type, constructed from sintered, oil impreg-
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 13
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.JCU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
nated ASTM A743, Grade CF8M, type 316 stainless steel. Bearings shall be permanently lu-
bricated.
G. Grit Seal
1. A PTFE flat compression washer shall be provided at the top and bottom of the plug to
prevent grit from entering the bearing area. 0 -ring style grit seals are not acceptable.
I. Direction of Operation
1. Counter - clockwise to open.
J. Painting
1. All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry and free from grease before painting. The
valve surfaces except for seat edges, rubber seat and finished portions shall be evenly coated with
an NSF 61 approved epoxy on the interior and exterior.
K. Acceptable Products
1. Zurik
2. Other manufacturers may be considered "or equal" with written pre- approval of the engi-
neering authority, made prior to bid in addendum form only.
L. Operators
1. Manual operators shall be for above grade service with hand wheel and position indication.
Worm gear operators shall be sized for the maximum rated working pressure and flow
conditions of the plug valve and must be capable of withstanding 300 foot pounds of torque
at the stops without damage. Worm gears sized to the flow conditions of the piping systems
are not acceptable.
2.10 AIR RELEASE VALVES
Air release valves shall be as manufactured by Crispin or equal and be provided with isolation ball
valves per plans Air release valves shall have a cast iron body conforming to ASTM Al26B. Air
release valve internal components shall be stainless steel including seat and float. Valve seating shall
be faced with stainless steel and Buna -N rubber. Minimum operating pressure shall be greater than 150
psig and less than 200psig. Air release valves shall be provided at the following locations:
A. On Each Pump Casing (3 locations): Crispin Series AR, Model No. AR8 with 3 /4" NPT inlet and
%2" NPT outlet. Valve shall be provided with a 5/64" orifice for a maximum pressure of 200 psig
and a discharge capacity of 12.45 SCFM. Operating pressure between 151 psig and 300 psig.
B. On Intake and Discharge Headers (2 locations): Crispin Series PL, Model No. PL20, Type P, with
2" NPT inlet and %2" NPT outlet. Valve shall be provided with a t /4" orifice at a maximum
pressure of 200 psig and a discharge rate of 127 SCFM. Operating pressure between 151 psig and
300 psig.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 14
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
2.11 VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
05/15/2012
A. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast -iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable
extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER ", bottom
section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5 -inch- diameter barrel.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee - handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate
deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
2. Valve boxes shall be M &H E -2702, Mueller H10364, or approved equal. Each box to be
slip type to adjust for a minimum cover of 48" bury. Extensions shall be M &H E -3120 or
Mueller H- 10375.
2.12 PIPING SUPPORTS
A. Pre- engineered adjustable saddle supports with U -bolt attachment and adjustable stanchions shall
be as manufactured by ANVIL or equal and shall be provided with a galvanized finish.
B. Special piping supports as noted on drawings shall be manufactured from structural piping unless
otherwise noted. Each tubing member shall be capped to prevent internal corrosion.
1. Vertical tubing members shall be solidly welded to the skid and shall support the
cantilevered weight of the piping when filled with water.
2. Horizontal tubing members shall be solidly welded to the vertical members, shall extend
beyond the pipe OD, and shall support the cantilevered weight of the piping when filled
with water.
3. Piping shall be secured to the horizontal member through the use of piping U bolts designed
for this purpose.
2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on each pump intake (suction) and discharge lines and where
noted on the pump intake and discharge headers (8 places).
B. Each gauge shall be filled to reduce wear due to vibration.
C. Gauge accuracy shall be within 9.5 %, and shall comply with ASME B40.1 Grade 2A.
D. Gauge diameter shall be 4.5" minimum.
E. Gauge materials of construction:
1. Connection and bourdon tube shall be from 316 stainless steel.
2. Movement shall be from stainless steel with an internal stop at 1.3 times the gauge range.
3. Dial shall be from white aluminum with black lettering and a stop at the 6 o'clock position.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 15
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.1CU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
4. Pointer shall be adjustable from black aluminum.
5. Turret style case shall be from black glass reinforced thermoplastic (PBTP), and shall have
built in rear flange lugs, with a solid front and blow -out back, rated at NEMA 4X.
6. Window shall be from acrylic.
7. Window gasket shall be from Buna -N.
8. Filling material shall be glycerin.
F. Range shall be selected so that operating pressure is in the mid range of the gauge.
G. Gauge shall resist shocks to 100G.
H. Pressure gauge shall be model 233.34 as manufactured by Wika.
2.14 PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
A. Pressure transducers shall be Rosemount 3051 SC mounted on the suction and discharge headers
and shall provide all pressure signals for the control logic. Pressure transducers shall be 3051 SC
by Rosemount.
13. Pressure transducer shall be supplied with an isolating ball valve.
C. Pressure transducers shall be a media isolated instrument, having no silicone oil, internal o -rings,
or welds.
D. Pressure transducer welted material shall be 17 -4PH stainless steel NACE compatible housed in
304 stainless steel with a male threaded process connection.
E. Pressure transducer shall provide a digital pulse output linear with the sensed pressure, from a
two wire 10 -28 VDC supply, reverse polarity protected.
F. Pressure transducer shall have an accuracy of plus /minus 0.25% BFSL.
G. Resolution of the transducer shall be greater than the resolution of the analog to digital
conversion for PLC operation.
H. Transducer shall be for pressures greater than station discharge pressure, and shall provide
gauge pressure output, rather than absolute pressure.
2.15 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER
The pumping system shall have a 12" flow sensor installed, which shall be utilized for control and to
display the pumping system flow rate, and to display total flow through the pumping system controller
operator interface device (OID). Flow meter shall be a Rosemount Series electro magnetic flow meter
comprised of two major components, an 8750 primary head (flow tube) and a (8712E for the tube)
signal converter only. Flow meter signal converter shall produce 4 -20mA signal in linear proportion
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 16
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
to flow rate. Meter shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer
shall have a US based manufacturing and assembly center.
A. Primary Head: The flow tube shall be a ANSI 126.5 class 150 flanged. Wetted liner shall be
Neoprene. The flow tube shall be finish painted on all outside metallic surfaces. Primary head
shall be NEMA 6 rated.
B. Signal Converter: The signal converter shall be NEMA 4X rated, and shall house the
microprocessor -based electronics required for magnet excitation and flow measurement.
Functions and data requirements shall be set by either a PC or by a hand held programmer. Unit
shall process flow using a bipolar pulsed DC signal. Power supply shall be 12 -24 VDC. Output
shall be 4 -20 mA.
2.16 PAINT (Exterior Piping, Valves, and Accessories) and Coatings:
A. Above slab ductile iron piping and custom pipe supports in booster pump station building:
1. Shop:
a. Surface Prep — Abrasive blast the entire exterior substrate to be painted removing any
rust and annealing oxides. Blast profile should average 1.5 mils. Prior to painting the
substrate must be clean dry and free of all contaminants.
b. One Coat — Tnemec Series N140 -1211 applied at 6 -8 mils dry.
2. Field:
a. Surface Prep — Prior to painting the substrate must be, clean dry and free of all
contaminants.
b. 1 Coat — Tnemec Series 135 applied at 3 -4 mils dry.
c. 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 72 applied at 2 -3 mils dry.
C. Exterior Valve bodies: If not specified above or provided standard with valve, valve bodies shall
be Valve exteriors for above ground service shall be coated with a universal, alkyd primer. Valve
interiors shall be coated with an ANSI/NSF 61 epoxy coating approved for potable water. Fusion
bonded epoxy shall be supplied on the exterior and interior.
D. Pipe Supports: Pipe supports shall be deslagged then grit- blasted per SSPC -SP6 to commercial
blast condition.
E. The cleaned steel surface shall be immediately coated with a polyurethane coating to a thickness
of no less than 5 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 17
Fort Gordon Gate 4
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications: Ductile -iron, push -on- retrained joint pipe, mechanical restrained joint fittings; and
flanged pipe.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used.
05/15/2012
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Make pipe joints according to the following.
1. Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water - Service Piping: AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Reference Section 3 05 01.02, "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ",
appended.
3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include
anchorages for the following piping systems.
1. Gasketed- Joint, Ductile -Iron, Piping: According to AWWA C600.
B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion - resistant material to surfaces of installed
ferrous anchorage devices.
3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. AWWA Butterfly and Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each
valve with stem pointing up and with valve box (underground only).
B. Air Relief Valves: Install per drawings.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Connect water - distribution piping to existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve
under the direct supervision of the Augusta Utilities Department. Tapping Sleeves and Valves
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 18
Fort Gordon Gate 4 05/15/2012
Booster Pump Station
Project No.ICU- 0068(FG- 88880003)
shall be chlorinated in accordance with AWWA requirements and shall be pressure tested prior to
tapping.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hydrostatic Testing: Reference Section 3 05 01.02 "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ", appended.
3.10 DISINFECTING
A. Cleaning and Disinfecting: Reference Section 33 13 00 "Disinfecting of Water Utility
Distribution ", appended.
3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Water supply main work as described in this section will be considered as incidental to the
construction of the various elements of the booster pump station installation it is associated with,
and no separate payment will be made therefore.
END OF SECTION 335100
WATER SUPPLY MAIN
335100 - 19
APPENDIX
TO
SECTION 335100 WATER SUPPLY MAIN
SECTION 33 05 01 02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
SECTION 33 12 19 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS
SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 33 05 01.02
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
Augusta Utilities Department's "Water & Sanitary Sewer Systems -
Guidelines" (most recent edition); available at
llwww.augustaga.govidepartments/planning_zoning/dev_docs.asp. In
the event that any specific item of work is not covered in this
specification the above referenced document shall govern.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
a. T99, Standard Specification for the Moisture- Density Relations of
Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5LB) Hammer and a 305mm (12 in.)
Drop.
3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C 104, Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
for Water.
b. C105, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems.
c. C110, Ductile Iron and Grey Iron - Fittings, 3 -inch through
48 -inch.
d. C111, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
e. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron and Grey Iron
Fittings.
f. C 150, Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe.
g. C151, Ductile -Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
h. C153, Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch through 24 -inch and
54 -inch through 64 -inch for Water Service.
i. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 -inch
Through 144 -inch (100mm through 3600mm).
j. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
k. C606, Grooved End, Shouldered Joints.
4. ASTM International (ASTM)
a. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
b. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
33 05 01.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
REVISION JULY 2008 1
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.02 SUBMITTALS
c. B 16.21, Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for
Pipe Flanges.
d. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting.
e. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets.
f. D 1922, Standard Test Method for Propagation Tear Resistance of
Plastic Filrn and Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method.
g. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications.
h. D4976, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding
and Extrusion Materials.
5. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Institute (DIPRA).
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings: Marking plan and details of standard pipe section
showing dimensions, pipe joints, fitting and special fitting pressure
rating and thickness, size, coating and lining data.
B. Informational Submittals:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pipe:
1. Field Hydrostatic Testing Plan: Submit at least 15 days prior to testing
and at minimum, include the following:
a. Testing dates.
b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.
c. Method of isolation.
d. Method of conveying water from source to system being tested.
e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s)
to be tested.
z. Certifications of Calibration: Approved testing laboratory certificate if
pressure gauge for hydrostatic test has been previously used. If pressure
gauge is new, no certificate is required.
1. General:
a. Centrifugally cast, grade 60 -42 -10 iron.
b. Meet requirements of AWWA C150, C153 and C111.
c. Lined and coated as specified.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 01.02
2 REVISION JULY 2008
B. Joints:
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2. Pressure rating of pipe as shown on drawings. Typically water mains 6
inches through 16 inches require a Pressure Class of 350 while water mains
18 inches through 24 inches require a Pressure Class of 300.
3. Pipe wall thickness of threaded pipe for a flanged pipe end shall be
minimum special thickness Class 53 from 12 -inch to 54 -inch diameter
pipe in accordance with AWWA C115.
4. Grooved end pipe, for all pipe diameters, shall be minimum Special
Class 53.
5. Pipe shall be new and recently manufactured. Refurbished pipe shall not
be provided.
1. Push -On Joint: Rated at minimum working pressure equal to pipe
material design.
2. Restrained Joint:
a. Manufactured proprietary joint that mechanically restrains pipe to
adjoining pipe.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) American Cast Iron Pipe; Flex -Ring and Lok -Ring.
2) U.S. Pipe; TR Flex.
3) Or approved equal.
3. Mechanical Wedge Action Type Joint:
a. Use only in areas where adjoining to fixed points where laying
length is determined in field.
b. Prior to purchase and, installation, type and application of this joint
shall be approved by Engineer.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) EBAA Iron; Mega -Lug
2) Smith - Blair, Inc.; 111 Cam -Lock
4. Flanged Joint: Threaded 250 psi working pressure ductile iron flanges
conforming to AWWA C115.
C. Fittings;
1. Ductile Iron, Push -On, Flanged or Restrained Joint: In accordance with
AWWA C110, at 250 psi minimum working pressure for 3- to 24 -inch
fittings and 150 psi minimum working pressure for 30- to 48 -inch
fittings.
2. Mechanical Joint Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C111.
3. Fittings shall be new and recently manufactured. Refurbished fittings
will not be accepted.
Welded Outlet: Only weld to pipe in manufacturer's shop.
33 05 01.02
REVISION JULY 2008 3
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
E. Lining:
1. Pipe and fittings for clean water applications shall be cement -lined and
asphaltic seal coated in accordance with AWWA C104.
2. Pipe and fittings for wastewater applications shall be lined with 40 -mil
ceramic epoxy, as manufactured by Induron.
Coating: Asphaltic type, 1 mil thick, in accordance with AWWA C151, C115,
C110 and C153.
G. Polyethylene Encasement:
1. Virgin polyethylene raw material conforming to requirements of
ASTM D4976.
2. Elongation: 800 percent, minimum, in machine and transverse direction
(ASTM D882).
3. Tensile Strength: 3,600 psi, minimum.
4. Dielectric Strength: 800V per mil- thickness, minimum.
5. Propagation Tear Resistance: 2,550 -grams force (gf), minimum, in
machine and transverse direction (ASTM D1922).
6. Tube form, conforming to AWWA C105.
7. Film shall have minimum thickness of 0.008 inch (8 m1).
H. Bolting:
1. Bolts for flanged connections shall be carbon steel, ASTM A307,
Grade A hex bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts.
2. Bolts for grooved end connections shall be manufacturer's standard.
I. Gaskets:
1. Gaskets for flat faced 150 and 250 psi working pressure flanges shall be
1/8 inch thick, red rubber (SBR), hardness 80 (Shore A), rated to
200 degrees F, conforming to ASME B16.21, AWWA C207, and
ASTM D1330, Grades 1 and 2.
2. Gaskets for grooved end joints shall be Halogenated butyl, conforming
to ASTM D2000 and AWWA C606,
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: In accordance with AWWA C104, C105, C110, C111, C115,
C150, C151, C153 and C606.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 01.02
4 REVISION JULY 2008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect pipe and fittings to ensure no cracked, broken, or otherwise defective
materials are being used.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Trench Grade:
1. Grade bottom of trench by hand to specified line and grade, with proper
allowance for pipe thicicness and pipe base, when specified. Trench
bottom shall form a continuous and uniform bearing and support for
pipe between bell holes.
2. Before laying each section of pipe, check grade and correct irregularities
found. Grade may be disturbed for removal of lifting tackle.
B. Bell (Joint) Holes: At each joint, dig bell holes of ample dimensions in bottom
of trench, and at sides where necessary, to permit joint to be made properly
and to permit easy visual inspection of entire joint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:
B. Cleaning Pipe and Fittings:
C. Laying Pipe:
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. Provide and use proper implements, tools, and facilities for safe and
proper prosecution of Work.
2. Lower pipe, fittings, and appurtenances into trench, piece by piece, by
means of a crane, slings, or other suitable tools and equipment, in such a
manner as to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings and
linings.
3. Do not drop or dump pipe materials into trench.
1. Remove lumps, blisters, and excess coal tar coating from bell and spigot
ends of each pipe. Wire brush outside of spigot and inside of bell and
wipe clean, dry, and free from oil and grease before pipe is laid.
2 Wipe ends of mechanical joint pipe and fittings and of rubber gasket
joint pipe and fittings clean of dirt, grease, and foreign matter.
33 05 01.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
REVISION JULY 2008 5
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. Direction of Laying: Lay pipe with bell end facing in direction of
laying. For lines on an appreciable slope, face bells upgrade at
discretion of Engineer.
2. Mechanical Joint, Push -On Joint, and Restrained Joint Pipe: After first
length of pipe is installed in trench, secure pipe in place with approved
backfill material tamped under and along sides to prevent movement.
Keep ends clear of backfill. After each section is jointed, place backfill
as specified to prevent movement.
3. Take precautions necessary to prevent floating of pipe prior to
completion of backfill operation.
4. When using movable trench shield, take necessary precautions to
prevent pipe joints from pulling apart when moving shield ahead.
5. Do not allow foreign material to enter pipe while it is being placed in
trench.
6. Close and block open end of last laid section of pipe to prevent entry of
foreign material or creep of gasketed joints when laying operations are
not in progress, at close of day's work, or whenever workers are absent
from job.
D. Joining Push -On Joint Pipe and Mechanical Joint Fittings:
1. Join pipe with push -on joints and mechanical joint fittings in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The process of
mechanized pipe joining must be approved by Owner and Engineer.
2. Provide special tools and devices, such as, special jacks, chokers, and
similar items required for installation.
3. Lubricate pipe gaskets using lubricant furnished by pipe manufacturer.
No substitutes will be permitted.
4. Clean ends of fittings of dirt, mud, and foreign matter by washing with
water and scrubbing with a wire brush, after which, slip gland and
gasket on plain end of pipe. If necessary, lubricate end of pipe to
facilitate sliding gasket in place, then guide fitting onto spigot of pipe
previously laid.
E. Cutting Pipe:
1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in a
neat and workmanlike manner without damaging pipe or lining and so
as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to axis of pipe.
2. Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter or saw. Do not flame cut.
3. Dressing Cut Ends: Dress cut end of mechanical joint pipe to remove
sharp edges or projections, which may damage rubber gasket. Dress cut
ends of push -on joint pipe by beveling, as recommended by
manufacturer.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 01.02
6 REVISION JULY 2008
F. Field Welding
1. Use of field welded outlets will not be allowed. Welding for outlets
shall be performed only in pipe manufacturer's shop.
2. Field installed outlets may be installed with saddle approved by
Engineer. Opening in pipe shall be machined cut and not with cutting
torch.
3. Field welding of bars for restrained joint systems will not be allowed.
All welding shall be performed in pipe manufacturer's shop.
G. Line and Grade:
3.04 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Pipeline Hydrostatic Test:
H. Thrust Restraint:
33 05 01.02
REVISION JULY 2008
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. Minimum Pipe Cover: 4 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. No high points will be allowed between air valves.
3. Maintain pipe grade between invert elevations to provide minimum
clearance at air valve locations of 4 feet from existing ground surface to
top of pipe.
4. Install air valves as shown and field verify intervening low points.
When field conditions warrant, exceptions may be made upon approval
of Engineer.
5. Deviations exceeding 6 inches from specified line or 1 inch from
specified grade will not be allowed without express approval of
Engineer.
6. Pipeline sections that are not installed to elevations shown or installed
as approved by Engineer shall be reinstalled to proper elevation.
1. Restrained joints only. Use of thrust blocking will not be allowed as
restraint unless specifically identified on plans and approved by the
Owner and Engineer.
I. Polyethylene Encasement:
1. Encase pipe, fittings, and valves where specified in accordance with
A W WA C105, Method A.
2. Cut polyethylene tube approximately 2 feet longer than pipe length.
3. Slip tube around pipe, centering to provide 1 -foot overlap on each
adjacent section.
4. Pull encasement to take out slack and wrap snug around pipe.
5. Secure overlap in place and fold at quarter points of pipe length.
6. Wrap and tape encasement snug around fittings and valves.
7
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
I. General:
a. Notify Owner in writing 5 days in advance of any testing. Perform
testing in presence of Owner or Engineer
b. Test newly installed pipelines. Using water as test medium, pipes
shall successfully pass a leakage test prior to acceptance.
c. Furnish testing equipment and perform tests in manner
satisfactory to Owner and Engineer. Testing equipment shall
provide observable and accurate measurements of leakage under
specified conditions.
d. Isolate new pipelines that are connected to existing pipelines.
e. Conduct tests on entire pipeline after trench has been backfilled.
Testing may be done prior to placement of asphaltic concrete or
roadway structural section.
f. Contractor may, if field conditions permit and as determined by
the Owner, partially backfill trench and leave joints open for
inspection and conduct an initial service leak test. Hydrostatic test
shall not, however, be conducted until backfilling has been
completed.
g. Owner shall provide gauge for pipeline hydrostatic test.
h. Contractor shall not work on sections of the successfully tested
line without the Owner's representative present.
2. Procedure:
a. Maximum filling velocity shall not exceed 0.25 foot per second,
calculated based on the full area of pipe.
b. Expel air from pipe system during filling. Expel air through air
release valve or through corporation stop installed at high points
and other strategic points.
c. Test pressure shall be one and a half times system operating
pressure, but in no case less than 200 psi as measured at low point
of pipeline.
d. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force
pump. Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached.
e. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours
minimum, adding additional make -up water only as necessary to
restore test pressure.
f. Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water
necessary to maintain specified test pressure for duration of test.
g. If measured leakage exceeds allowable leakage or if leaks are
visible, repair defective pipe section and repeat hydrostatic test.
3. Allowable Leakage: Maximum allowable leakage shall not exceed
amount stated in AWWA C600.
END OF SECTION
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 01.02
8 REVISION JULY 2008
1.02 SUBMITTALS
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 33 1219
WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Augusta Utilities Department's "Water & Sanitary Sewer Systems -
Guidelines" (most recent edition); available at
//vvww.augustaga.govidepartm.ents/planning_zoning/dev_docs.asp. In
the event that any specific item of work is not covered in this
specification the above referenced document shall govern.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C502, Dry - Barrel Fire Hydrants.
b. C600, Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and
Their Appurtenances.
3. ASTM International (ASTM): C94, Standard Specification for Ready -
Mixed Concrete.
A. Action Submittals: Catalog cuts of system components.
B. Informational Submittal: Certificate of Compliance: Upon completion of the
system installation, Contractor to verify all fire department hose connections,
and check all fire safety devices to ensure their readiness for emergency
connection and operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Hydrant:
33 12 19 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
REVISION JULY 2008
1. Break flange or safety top type.
2. Nominal 5 -1/4 -inch main valve opening with 6 -inch bottom
connections.
3. Conform to AWWA C502.
4. Two 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles.
5. One 4 -112 -inch pumper nozzle.
6. Operating Nuts: 1 -1/2 -inch National Standard pentagon nut.
7. Mechanical joint inlet connection.
1 FIRE HYDRANTS
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
8. Yellow above ground line.
9. Integral Davidson Anti- Terrorist Valve.
10. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Mueller; #A -24018
b. M &H Figure 129T
c. American AVK 2700 Series
B. Main Valve:
1. Depth of Bury: 4 feet.
2. Equip with 0-ring seals.
3. Valve opens on clockwise /counterclockwise rotation as specified on
drawings.
4. U.S. Pipe Metro -Seal 250 Resilient Seated Gate Valve
2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE PIER BLOCK
A. Nominal dimensions of 8 -inch thickness by 16 -inch square base.
13. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days.
2.03 GRAVEL FOR DRAINAGE
A. Washed 3/4 -inch drainage gravel. Free of organic matter, sand, loam, clay, and
other small particles that will restrict water flow through gravel.
2.04 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION MATERIAL
A. Furnish when existing trench material or imported pipe base material will not
support soft or flooded spots in excavated trench.
B. Maximum 3 -inch hard rock free from excessive clay material, but enough
fines to bind Larger fragments.
2.05 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKING
A. Ready -mix meeting ASTM C94, Alternative 2.
B. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days.
C. Aggregate Size: 1 -1/2 inches.
D. Slump: 2 to 4 inches.
WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 33 12 19
FIRE HYDRANTS 2 REVISION JULY 2008
1. EBAA Iron; Mega-Lug
2. Smith- Blair, Inc.; 111 Cam -Lock
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.06 THRUST TIES
A. 3/4 -inch diameter steel rods.
B. Duc -Lugs Manufacturer: The Stellar Corp., Columbus, 01-1.
2.07 MECHANICAL WEDGE ACTION TYPE JOINT:
A. Prior to purchase and installation, type and application of this joint shall be
approved by Engineer.
B. Manufacturers and Products:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install hydrants in accordance with Sections 3.7 and 3.8 of AWWA C600,
unless specified otherwise.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate to subgrade. Fill over excavated areas with foundation stabilization
material. Tamp to provide firm foundation.
3.03 BASE BLOCK
A. Place on firm, level subgrade to ensure uniform support.
104 INSTALLATION OF HYDRANTS
A. Locate hydrants to provide accessibility and to minimize potential damage
from vehicles.
1. Relocate improperly set hydrants.
2. Hydrant Located behind Curbs: Set barrel so pumper nozzle or hose
nozzle caps are a minimum of 18 inches from gutter face of curb.
3. Hydrant Located in Space between Curb and Sidewalk: Not less than 8
inches, clear from sidewalks.
4. Hydrant Located between Sidewalk and Property Line: Minimum
clearance 8 inches from sidewalk.
33 12 19 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
REVISION JULY 2008 3 FIRE HYDRANTS
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5. Set hydrants so safety flange is a minimum of 2 inches above finished
ground or sidewalk level.
B. Place hydrant on base block carefully to prevent the base block from breaking.
C. Joints shall conform to Section 3.4 of AWWA C600 when cast or ductile iron
pipe is used.
Maintain hydrant in a plumb position during subsequent Work.
E. Hydrant valve not to exceed 4 feet from main line tee unless specifically
approved by the Owner's representative.
3.05 GRAVEL FOR DRAINAGE
A. Place gravel around base block and hydrant bottom in accordance with
Section 3.7 of AWWA C600.
3.06 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKING
A. Place blocking after hydrant is set in final position and joined to pipe.
B. Concrete thrust block shall have a minimum of 4 square feet of bearing area
against undisturbed earth.
3.07 THRUST TIES
A. Install thrust ties in lieu of concrete thrust blocking when ground surface
behind hydrant is less than 2 feet above top of hydrant base.
1. Install two tie rods between main valve and hydrant.
2. Install mechanical joint glands with lugs in joints between hydrant, main
valve and main line tee.
3.08 MECHANICAL WEDGE ACTION TYPE JOINT
A. Install mechanical wedge anchors at every joint between main line tee and fire
hydrant.
END OF SECTION
WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 33 12 19
FIRE HYDRANTS 4 REVISION JULY 2008
1.02 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 33 13 00
DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Augusta Utilities Department's "Water & Sanitary Sewer Systems-
Guidelines" (most recent edition); available at
ilwvvw.augustaga.govidepartments/planning_zoning/dev_docs.asp. In
the event that any specific item of work is not covered in this
specification the above referenced document shall govern.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. B300, Hypochlorites.
b. B301, Liquid Chlorine.
c. B302, Ammonium Sulfate
d. B303, Sodium Chlorite.
e. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains.
f. C652, Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities.
g. C653, Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants.
3. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, as
published by American Public Health Association, American Water
Works Association, and the Water Environment Federation.
A. Informational Submittals:
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. Plan describing and illustrating conformance to appropriate AWWA
standards and this Specification (if required).
2. Procedure and plan for cleaning system.
3. Procedures and plans for disinfection and testing.
4. Proposed locations within system where Samples will be taken.
5. Type of disinfecting solution and method of preparation.
6. Certification that employees working with concentrated chlorine
solutions have received appropriate safety training.
7. Method of disposal for highly chlorinated disinfecting water.
33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER
REVISION JULY 2008 1 UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER FOR DISINFECTION AND TESTING
A. Clean, uncontaminated, and potable.
B. Owner will supply potable quality water. Contractor shall convey in
disinfected pipelines or containers.
2.02 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish chemicals and equipment, such as pumps and hoses, to accomplish
disinfection.
B. Water used to fill pipeline may be supplied using a temporary connection to
existing distribution system. Provide protection against cross - connections as
required by AWWA C651.
2.03 DISINFECTANT
A. The following disinfectant product(s) shall not be used: chlorine gas.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conform to AWWA C651 for pipes and pipelines, except as modified in these
Specifications.
B. Disinfect the following items installed or modified under this Project, intended
to hold, transport, or otherwise contact potable water:
1. Pipelines: Disinfect new pipelines that connect to existing pipelines up
to point of connection.
2. Disinfect surfaces of materials that will contact finished water, both
during and following construction, using one of the methods described
in AWWA C652 and C653. Disinfect prior to contact with finished
water. Take care to avoid recontamination following disinfection.
C. Prior to application of disinfectants, clean pipelines of loose and suspended
material.
D. Allow freshwater and disinfectant solution to flow into pipe or vessel at a
measured rate so chlorine -water solution is at specified strength. Do not place
concentrated liquid commercial disinfectant in pipeline or other facilities to be
disinfected before it is filled with water.
DISINFECTION OF WATER 33 13 00
UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 2 REVISION JULY 2008
E. Owner will supply sufficient potable water and testing for the Contractor to
complete the initial execution outlined in this section. The Contractor is
responsible to the Owner for the costs of additional potable water and testing
due to failure of the initial tests.
3.02 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Commence initial disinfection after completion of following:
1. Completion and acceptance of internal painting of system(s).
2. Hydrostatic and pneumatic testing, pressure testing, functional and
performance testing and acceptance of pipelines, pumping systems,
structures, and equipment.
3. Disinfection of:
a. Pumps and associated system piping.
b. Treatment plant basins and processes used to supply water to
system.
3.03 PIPING AND PIPELINES
A. Cleaning:
1. Before disinfecting, clean all foreign matter from pipe in accordance
with AWWA C651.
2. If the continuous feed method or the slug method of disinfection, as
described in AWWA C651 are used, flush pipelines with potable water
until clear of suspended solids and color. Provide hoses, temporary
pipes, ditches, and other conduits as needed to dispose of flushing water
without damage to adjacent properties.
3. Flush service connections and hydrants. Flush distribution lines prior to
flushing hydrants and service connections. Operate valves during
flushing process at least twice during each flush.
4. Flush pipe through flushing branches and remove branches after
flushing is completed.
B. Disinfecting Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C651, unless herein
modified.
3.04 PUMPS
A. Disinfecting Solutions: Minimum free chlorine concentration of 100 ppm.
13. Application:
33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER
REVISION JULY 2008 3 UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
l . Inject disinfecting solution into pump and associated piping and
circulate for a minimum 3 -hour period of time. At end of 3 -hour period,
solution shall have a strength of at least 50 ppm free chlorine.
2. Operate valves and pump appurtenances during disinfection to ensure
that disinfecting solution is dispersed into all parts of pump and lines.
3. If disinfecting solution contained in pump has a residual free chlorine
concentration less than 50 ppm after the 3 -hour retention period, reclean
pump, reapply disinfecting solution, and retest until a satisfactory test
result is obtained.
4. After chlorination, flush water from pump until water through the unit is
chemically and bacteriologically equal to permanent source of supply.
3.05 TANKS AND RESERVOIRS
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean interior surfaces using water under pressure before sterilizing.
Isolate tank or reservoir from system to prevent contaminating materials
from entering the distribution system. Cleaning shall:
a. Remove all deposits of foreign nature.
b. Remove all biological growths.
c. Clean the slopes, walls, top, and bottom.
d. Avoid damage to the.structure.
e. Avoid pollution or oil deposits by workers and equipment.
2. Dispose of water used in cleaning in accordance with applicable
regulations before adding disinfecting solution to tank or reservoir.
B. Disinfecting Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C652, unless herein
modified. Parts of structures, such as ceilings or overflows that cannot be
immersed, shall be spray or brush disinfected.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF HEAVILY CHLORINATED WATER
A. Do not allow flow into a waterway without neutralizing disinfectant residual.
B. See the appendix of AWWA C651 or C652 as applicable for acceptable
neutralization methods.
3.07 TESTING
A. Collection of Samples:
1. Coordinate activities to allow Samples to be taken in accordance with
this Specification.
DISINFECTION OF WATER 33 13 00
UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 4 REVISION JULY 2008
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2. Provide valves at sampling points.
3. Provide access to sampling points.
4. The Owner's laboratory will obtain the Samples.
B. Test Equipment:
1. The Owner's laboratory will provide the testing equipment.
C. Chlorine Concentration Sampling and Analysis:
1. The Owner's laboratory will collect and analyze Samples in accordance
with pertinent AWWA sections.
2. Sampling Frequency for Disinfecting Solution: 2 Samples per segment
tested.
3. Residual Free Chlorine Samples: 2 Samples per segment tested.
4. Dechlorinated Disinfecting Wastewater Residual Samples: as necessary.
5. Sampling Locations: as determined by the Owner /Engineer.
6. Analysis to be performed by the Owner's laboratory. Samples will be
analyzed for free chlorine as described in latest edition of Standard
Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater.
D. After tanks, reservoirs, pumps, and pipelines have been cleaned, disinfected,
and refilled with potable water, Owner will take water Samples and have them
analyzed for conformance to bacterial limitations for public drinking water
supplies.
1. Samples shall be collected in accordance with applicable AWWA
Standard.
2. Samples shall be analyzed for coliform concentrations in accordance
with latest edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
and Wastewater.
3. A minimum of two Samples on each of 2 consecutive days from each
separable structure and every 1,000 feet of pipeline shall be obtained
and analyzed by standard procedures outlined by state and local
regulatory agencies.
4. Sampling points shall be representative and accepted by the
Owner /Engineer.
5. Initial samples at each location to be scheduled on a Monday, Tuesday,
or Wednesday unless a deviation is specifically approved by the Owner.
6. Contractor shall provide the Owner a minimum of 48 -hours notice prior
to the initiation of the sampling process.
33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER
REVISION JULY 2008 5 UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
AUGUSTA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
E. If minimum Samples required above are bacterially positive, disinfecting
procedures and bacteriological testing shall be repeated until bacterial limits
are met.
END OF SECTION
DISINFECTION OF WATER 33 13 00
UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 6 REVISION JULY 2008
0